OSN 550 V100R007C10 Product Description

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical
Transmission System
V100R007C10
Product Description
Issue 02
Date 2014-04-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2014-04-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation.
Product Name Product Version
OptiX OSN 550 V100R007C10
iManager U2000 V200R001C00

Intended Audience
This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in terms of network application, functions,
hardware structure, software architecture, features, and technical specifications.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers
l Data configuration engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium
level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission
System
Product Description About This Document
ii
Symbol Description
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that,
if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points in the main text.

GUI Conventions
Convention Meaning
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are
in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.
For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2014-04-15) Based on Product Version
V100R007C10
This document is the second issue for product version V100R007C10. Compared with issue 01
of product version V100R007C10, version 02 includes the following updates in
V100R007C10SPC200:
l Optimized the description in the "Quick Reference" section.
l Optimized description about the TDM capacity.
V100R007C10
This document is the first issue for product version V100R007C10. Compared with issue 02 of
product version V100R007C00, version 01 of product version V100R007C10 includes the
following updates:
System
iii
l Updated the mapping product versions.
V100R007C00
V100R007C00SPC100:
l Added the description that only 10GE ports support MRPS in the "Quick Reference"
section.
l Deleted the specifications of originally supported 10GE single-fiber bidirectional optical
ports in the "Optical Port Specifications" section.
Updates in Issue 01 (2013-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R007C00
This is the first document issue for the V100R007C00 product version. Compared with the
document issue for the V100R006C01 product version, this issue has the following updates:
l Added MPLS-TP Ring Protection Switching (MRPS) in sections "Quick Reference" and
"Network Level Protection (Packet)". (MPLS-TP is short for multiprotocol label switching
transport profile.)
l Updated the number of FE/GE ports supported by the equipment based on the added EGS4
board in sections "Quick Reference", "Access Capacities", and "Types of Supported
Services".
l Added the EGS4 board in section "Board Category".
l Added the specifications of single-fiber bidirectional optical ports in section "Optical Port
Specifications".
V100R006C01SPC100:
l Updated the number of supported FE electrical ports in sections "Quick Reference" and
"Access Capacities."
l FE8F boards' support for FE electrical ports is added to sections "Types of Supported
Services" and "Board Category."
This document is the first issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue 1 of
product version V100R006C00, this issue incorporates the following updates:
l Added the 1x10GE Ethernet processing board EX1.
l Added the 4xchannelized STM-1 service processing board CQ1.
l
System
iv
l Updated the service access capability of the equipment according to the new boards.
l Optimized the structure and related description of the "Product Positioning and Features",
"Quicklook", "Networking and Application Scenarios" sections.
This issue is used for first office application (FOA) of V100R006C00.
System
v
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Product Positioning and Features...............................................................................................1
1.1 Product Positioning.........................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Product Features.............................................................................................................................................................2
2 Quick Reference.............................................................................................................................6
3 System Architecture and Service Access.................................................................................21
3.1 System Architecture.....................................................................................................................................................22
3.2 Service Types...............................................................................................................................................................23
3.2.1 Types of Supported Services.....................................................................................................................................23
3.2.2 Access Capacities......................................................................................................................................................25
4 Product Features...........................................................................................................................27
4.1 Services Supported.......................................................................................................................................................28
4.1.1 Service Overview (Packet)........................................................................................................................................28
4.1.2 Service Overview (TDM)..........................................................................................................................................34
4.2 Redundancy and Protection..........................................................................................................................................40
4.2.1 Equipment Level Protection......................................................................................................................................40
4.2.2 Network Level Protection (Packet)...........................................................................................................................41
4.2.3 Network Level Protection (TDM).............................................................................................................................56
4.3 Synchronization............................................................................................................................................................65
4.3.1 Requirements for Clock Synchronization..................................................................................................................65
4.3.2 Clock and Time Synchronization..............................................................................................................................66
5 Hardware and Structure.............................................................................................................76
5.1 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................................................77
5.1.1 Chassis Structure.......................................................................................................................................................77
5.1.2 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (Packet)...................................................................................................80
5.1.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (TDM).....................................................................................................81
5.2 Outdoor Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................................82
5.3 Board Category.............................................................................................................................................................83
6 Networking and Application Scenarios..................................................................................92
6.1 Basic Network Topologies...........................................................................................................................................93
System
Product Description Contents
vi
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking.................................................................................................................94
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking........................................................................................................100
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking..................................................................................................................106
7 Network Management System................................................................................................109
7.1 Network Management................................................................................................................................................110
7.2 DCN Management......................................................................................................................................................112
7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs.............................................................................................................113
8 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................115
8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet)....................................................................................................................................120
8.1.1 TP-Assist.................................................................................................................................................................120
8.1.2 MPLS OAM............................................................................................................................................................121
8.1.3 MPLS-TP OAM......................................................................................................................................................122
8.1.4 ETH OAM...............................................................................................................................................................122
8.1.5 ATM OAM..............................................................................................................................................................124
8.1.6 RMON.....................................................................................................................................................................124
8.1.7 PRBS.......................................................................................................................................................................125
8.1.8 CES Alarm Transmission........................................................................................................................................125
8.1.9 Port Mirroring..........................................................................................................................................................127
8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM).....................................................................................................................................128
8.2.1 PRBS.......................................................................................................................................................................128
8.2.2 ETH OAM...............................................................................................................................................................128
8.2.3 RMON.....................................................................................................................................................................128
8.2.4 Data Test Frame.......................................................................................................................................................128
8.3 Upgrade Methods.......................................................................................................................................................128
9 Security Management...............................................................................................................130
9.1 Authentication Management.......................................................................................................................................131
9.2 Authorization Management........................................................................................................................................131
9.3 Network Security Management..................................................................................................................................131
9.4 System Security Management....................................................................................................................................133
9.5 Log Management........................................................................................................................................................133
10 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................136
10.1 General Specifications..............................................................................................................................................138
10.2 Packet Performance Indicators.................................................................................................................................139
10.3 TDM Performance Indicators...................................................................................................................................147
10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board......................................................................................................150
10.5 Optical Port Specifications.......................................................................................................................................151
10.6 Colored Optical Ports...............................................................................................................................................161
10.7 Electrical Port Specifications....................................................................................................................................164
10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications....................................................................................................................................167
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation.....................................................................................................................................169
System
vii
10.10 Safety Certification.................................................................................................................................................175
10.11 Environmental Specifications.................................................................................................................................176
10.11.1 Storage Environment...........................................................................................................................................176
10.11.2 Transportation Environment................................................................................................................................178
10.11.3 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed in a Cabinet)............................................................181
10.11.4 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed on a Wall)................................................................185
11 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection...................................................................191
12 Standard Compliance.............................................................................................................192
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations.........................................................................................................................................193
12.2 IETF Standards.........................................................................................................................................................196
12.3 IEEE Standards.........................................................................................................................................................199
12.4 Environment Related Standards...............................................................................................................................200
12.5 MEF Standards.........................................................................................................................................................201
12.6 Safety Standards.......................................................................................................................................................201
12.7 EMC Standards.........................................................................................................................................................202
12.8 Protection Standards.................................................................................................................................................204
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................205
System
viii
1 Product Positioning and Features
About This Chapter
With the increasing number of packet services, conventional time division multiplexing (TDM)
devices cannot meet packet service transmission demands. The OptiX OSN 550 supports a
variety of service network topologies in the TDM and packet domains, able to meet customers'
various service development demands.
1.1 Product Positioning
This section describes product positioning and networking application.
1.2 Product Features
This section describes the equipment features in terms of architecture and technology.
System
Product Description 1 Product Positioning and Features
1
1.1 Product Positioning
This section describes product positioning and networking application.
The OptiX OSN 550 is a packet- and TDM-oriented new-generation multi-service CPE optical
transmission system, which is positioned at the access layer among Huawei's end-to-end Hybrid
multi-service transmission platform (MSTP) product series. This system is characterized by its
large capacity, high availability, low power consumption, and compact structure.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiprotocol label switching (MPLS), MPLS-transport profile
(MPLS-TP), pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3), Ethernet, ATM, WDM, SDH, and
PDH technologies. With these technologies, a pure TDM network, pure PTN network, or Hybrid
network can be provisioned.
As the access layer equipment, the OptiX OSN 550 is networked with other OptiX OSN
equipment to provide a complete solution covering the backbone layer, aggregation layer, and
access layer. The complete solution meets 2G/3G/LTE base station backhaul and enterprise
leased service access demands. Figure 1-1 illustrates the network application of the OptiX OSN
550.
Figure 1-1 Network application of the OptiX OSN 550
OptiX OSN 550
BTS NodeB BSC RNC
E1/T1
ATM/IMA
E1
OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II
E1/STM-1
FE
E1/FE/GE
Enterprise
leased service
E1/FE/GE
ATM/IMA
E1/GE
E1/T1
FE
Convergence node Access layer
Convergence/Backbo
ne layer

1.2 Product Features
This section describes the equipment features in terms of architecture and technology.
System
2
Large Capacity, High Availability, Low Power Consumption, and Compact
Structure
The OptiX OSN 550 is access layer equipment, which features large capacity, high availability,
low power consumption, and compact structure. The OptiX OSN 550 supports:
l A maximum of 60 Gbit/s packet switching capacity, a maximum of 20 Gbit/s SDH cross-
connect capacity, and a maximum of four 10GE ports
l 1+1 protection for system control, switching, timing, and power supply units, and network-
level protection such as tunnel APS, PW APS, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP),
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS), link aggregation group (LAG), link-state pass
through (LPT), Multi-Link Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP), linear multiplex section
protection (LMSP), MPLS-TP Ring Protection Switching (MRPS) (MPLS-TP is short for
multiprotocol label switching transport profile), subnetwork connection protection
(SNCP), and multiplex section protection (MSP), to improve equipment reliability
l A maximum power consumption of 300 W, a typical power consumption of only 149 W
in Hybrid mode, and a typical power consumption of 67 W in TDM mode
l Dimensions (H x W x D) of 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm
Universal Switch Architecture and Multi-service Transmission
The OptiX OSN 550 has a universal switch architecture, as shown in Figure 1-2. The OptiX
OSN 550 supports coexistence of the time division multiplexing (TDM) domain and packet
transport network (PTN) domain, which achieves smooth evolution from the TDM domain to
the PTN domain while allowing the on-demand configuration and application of pure TDM
services and packet services.
Figure 1-2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 550
TDM Cross-connect
TDM
EoS
STM-N
STM-N
TDM equipment
architecture
Packet Switch
PWE3
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Packet equipment
architecture
TDM/EoS
Ethernet
PWE3
STM-N
Ethernet
Hybrid MSTP
architecture
+
TDM Cross-
connect
Packet Switch

The OptiX OSN 550 supports the access and transmission of PDH, SDH, ATM, Ethernet, MPLS,
and MPLS-TP services.
In the PTN domain, the OptiX OSN 550 performs highly efficient statistical multiplexing of
data services to reduce the service transport expenditure per bit. In the TDM domain, the OptiX
System
3
OSN 550 incorporates SDH functions to ensure the high transport quality of Native TDM
services (mainly voice services).
End-to-End Service Configuration, One-Click Commissioning, and One-Click
Fault Locating (TP-Assist)
Compared with legacy TDM networks, PTN networks have the following characteristics in terms
of O&M:
l Lack of overheads indicating the physical states of networks. When a fault occurs on a PTN
network, no visual and fast indicator is available to locate the fault.
l Networking diversity and complication, which require powerful O&M capabilities
To address those issues, the equipment uses the TP-Assist to provide more O&M means and
simplify O&M operations for PTN networks during installation, commissioning, service
configuration, fault locating, and routine maintenance. With the TP-Assist, PTN networks have
the SDH-like O&M capabilities, which reduce the technical requirements for O&M personnel
and improve O&M efficiency.
Hierarchical OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions and have the SDH-like O&M
capabilities. It can quickly detect and locate faults at each layer.
The hierarchical OAM functions include ETH OAM, MPLS tunnel/PW OAM, and MPLS-TP
tunnel/PW OAM. Figure 1-3 shows the application of hierarchical OAM.
Figure 1-3 Application of hierarchical OAM
CE1
CE2
PE1
CE4
CE3
P
P
P
P
P
PE2
Ethernet Service OAM
Ethernet Port OAM
Ethernet Port OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM
ETH Layer
PW Layer
Tunnel Layer
MEP
MEP
MEP MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP MIP
OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II

System
4
Strong Environmental Adaptability
l The OptiX OSN 550 can be mounted in an ETSI or 19-inch cabinet, or outdoor cabinet, or
open rack, or on a wall or desk.
l The OptiX OSN 550 supports the -48 V/-60 V DC power supply, 110 V/220 V AC power
supply, and uninterruptible power module (UPM) power supply. The UPM offers the
storage battery protection function and can feed 3-4 hours' power in the case of a
commercial power outage.
l The OptiX OSN 550 can operate at a high temperature.
Extended operating temperature: -5C to 65C
NOTE
Extended operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4
hours per day and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.
System
5
2 Quick Reference
This chapter describes the product overview, including product photos, hardware, software, and
functions and features.
Table 2-1 lists the overview of the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 2-1 Overview of the OptiX OSN 550
Item Description
Appearan
ce
Chassis dimensions (H x W x D): 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm
Board l System control, switching, and timing boards: CXL and PCX
l Packet processing boards: CQ1, EF8F, EG4C, EM6F, EM6T, EX1, and MD1
l SDH boards: SL1D, SL1Q, and SL4D
l PDH boards: PL3T and SP3D
l EoS boards: EFS8, EGS4, and EGT1
l MDM board: DMD2
l Auxiliary boards: AUX and FAN
l Power supply boards: APIU, PIU, and UPM
For services and ports supported by the preceding boards, see Table 5-4.
Packet
functions
and
features
See Table 2-2.
System
Product Description 2 Quick Reference
6
Item Description
TDM
functions
and
features
See Table 2-3.
Packet
switching
capacity
60 Gbit/s
TDM
cross-
connect
capacity
l Higher order cross-connect capacity: 20 Gbit/s
l Lower order cross-connect capacity: 5 Gbit/s
Equipme
nt-level
protection
l 1+1 backup for power supply
l 1+1 backup between active and standby system control, switching, and timing
boards
l Fan protection (The failure in a single fan does not affect the operation of the
other fans.)
Intelligen
t fan
speed
adjustme
nt
Supports the automatic adjustment of fan speed based on the highest temperature
of the board in the chassis.
Managem
ent ports
and
auxiliary
ports
Interface Type Description Connector
External clock
port
120-ohm external clock
port, which can work in
2048 kbit/s mode or
2048 kHz mode
RJ45
External time port Two external time
input/output ports
RJ45
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet: The
equipment provides
one port for monitoring
and managing an
outdoor cabinet.
RJ45
Power supply
port
Power supply port
connecting to two
-48/-60 V DC power
supplies
2 mm HM connector
Two 110 V/220 V AC
power supply ports
Three-phase socket
System
7
Item Description
Network
management port
Ethernet NM port/NM
serial port, which is
connected to a network
management system
(NMS)
RJ45
Alarm input/
output port
6-input/2-output alarm
port
RJ45
64 kbit/s
synchronous
transparent data
port or 19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous
transparent data
port
One 64 kbit/s
synchronous serial port
or one 19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous serial
port, which
transparently transmits
one channel of data
services
RJ45
Orderwire phone
port
Used to provide voice
communication for
operation/maintenance
engineers at different
workstations.
RJ45

Table 2-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet functions and features
Ite
m
Description
MP
LS
func
tion
s
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement
MPLS/MPLS-TP functions.
l Setup mode: static tunnels
l Protection: 1:1 tunnel automatic protection switching (APS)
l Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM): supports Tunnel OAM and
multiprotocol label switching transfer profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM. Tunnel
OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP tunnel OAM complies with
ITU-T G.8113.1.
System
8
Ite
m
Description
PW
E3
func
tion
s
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement
PWE3 functions.
l Service categories
TDM PWE3 services (circuit emulation services [CESs])
Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) PWE3 services
ETH PWE3 services
l Setup mode: static pseudo wires (PWs)
l Supports single-segment PWs (SS-PWs) and multi-segment PWs (MS-PWs).
l PW encapsulation mode: Ethernet or Ethernet Tagged Mode
l PW control word: supported by the PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB board whose
printed circuit board (PCB) version is Ver.B and the PCXLX/PCXX board.
l Protection: 1:1 PW APS
l OAM: supports MPLS PW OAM and MPLS-TP PW OAM. MPLS PW OAM
complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP PW OAM complies with ITU-T G.
8113.1.
Pac
ket
syst
em
perf
orm
ance
See Table 10-2.
Serv
ice
Service Category Maximum
Receiving
Capability
Service Port
Description Connector
Ethernet service:
l Supports the MPLS
technology.
l Supports the VLAN
technology.
l Supports the QinQ
technology.
l Supports Native E-
Line services based on
PORT, PORT
+VLAN, PORT
+VLAN+VLAN Pri,
and PORT+QinQ.
l Supports E-Line
services based on
FE (electrical
port): 48
10/100BASE-T
(X)
RJ-45
FE (optical
port): 48
l 100BASE-
BX
l 100BASE-
FX
l 100BASE-
LX
l 100BASE-
VX
l 100BASE-
ZX
LC
System
9
Ite
m
Description
PWE3 (VPWS
services).
l Supports Native E-
LAN services based
on the IEEE 802.1d
bridge, IEEE 802.1q
bridge, and IEEE
802.1ad bridge.
l Supports E-LAN
services based on
PWE3 (VPLS
services).
l Supports the
following Ethernet
data frame formats:
IEEE 802.3 and
Ethernet II.
l Supports jumbo
frames.
l Supports the
maximum
transmission unit
(MTU) of 960 to 9600
bytes (1620 bytes by
default).
GE (optical
port): 22
l 1000BASE-
SX
l 1000BASE-
LX
l 1000BASE-
VX
l 1000BASE-
ZX
LC
GE (electrical
port): 20
1000BASE-T RJ-45
10GE (optical
ports): 4
l 10GBASE-
SR (LAN)
l 10GBASE-
SW (WAN)
l 10GBASE-
LR (LAN)
l 10GBASE-
LW (WAN)
l 10GBASE-
ER (LAN)
l 10GBASE-
EW (WAN)
l 10GBASE-
ZR (LAN)
l 10GBASE-
ZW (WAN)
LC
System
10
Ite
m
Description
E1 service:
l Service types:
TDM PWE3 (CES
E1)
ATM PWE3
Fractional CES E1
ML_PPP E1
l Encapsulation
formats:
CESoPSN
SAToP
l Compression of idle
timeslots: supported
only for CESoPSN
encapsulation
l E1 coding format:
HDB3
l L/M/R bit processing:
supported for CES
services
l CES ACR: supported
l ATM/IMA/
E1: 192xE1
l Channelized
STM-1:
24xSTM-1
l ATM/IMA/
E1: 75/120
ohm smart
E1 port
l Channelized
STM-1:
S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2 optical
ports and
STM-1 SFP
electrical
port
l ATM/IMA/E1:
Anea 96
l Channelized
STM-1: LC
optical port and
SAA straight
female
System
11
Ite
m
Description
ATM/IMA service:
l Supports ATM PWE3
services.
l Supports ATM traffic
management.
l Supports the
following ATM
encapsulation modes:
N-to-one VPC
N-to-one VCC
One-to-one VPC
One-to-one VCC
l Supports a maximum
of 31 concatenated
ATM cells.
l Supports the
following ATM
OAM: F4 (VP layer)
and F5 (VC layer).
l Supports inverse
multiplexing over
ATM (IMA).
192xE1 75/120-ohm
smart E1 port
Anea 96
Prot
ectio
n
Tunnel
APS
Complies with the ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131 standards.
l Maximum number of protection groups: 64
l Switching duration: 50 ms (for two tunnel APS protection groups
with 16 PWs per group after a link is faulty bidirectionally)
NOTE
l Tunnel APS and PW APS share 64 protection group resources.
l MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS-TP tunnel APS share 64 protection group
resources.
PW APS Complies with the ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131 standards.
l Maximum number of members bound into a PW: 512
l Switching duration: 50 ms (for a protection pair that contains eight
members or six PW APS protection groups after a link is faulty
bidirectionally)
NOTE
l Tunnel APS and PW APS share 64 protection group resources.
l MPLS PW APS and MPLS-TP PW APS share 64 protection group resources.
System
12
Ite
m
Description
MRPS Supports coexistence of MRPS rings and tunnel APS. ETH PWE3
services on the MRPS rings do not support the PW control word mode.
MRPS is implemented based on ITU-T G.8132.
l Number of rings: 4
l Number of nodes per ring: 64
l Number of virtual nodes per ring: 32
l Number of multicast services supported by a ring node: 16
l Number of multicast services supported per ring: 8
NOTE
Only 10GE ports support MRPS.
The number of nodes per ring is the number of physical nodes on the ring.
The number of virtual nodes per ring is the number of virtual intersecting nodes
that are created to contain the two most remote physical interconnecting nodes on
the ring. When a ring intersects with multiple rings, the virtual intersecting node
must be created to contain the two most remote physical intersecting nodes on the
ring and each other ring.
MSTP Complies with the IEEE 802.1s standard.
l Maximum number of instances per port: 1
l Maximum number of port groups: 1
l Maximum number of ports provided by all port groups: 16
ERPS Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032 and ITU-T Y.1344.
l Switching duration: 50 ms at an optical port and 2s at an
electrical port if the number of nodes on a ring network is not more
than 16 and the link is faulty bidirectionally
NOTE
Only Native ETH services support ERPS.
LPT Complies with the Huawei proprietary protocol.
l Maximum number of services that support LPT: 16
l Point-point and point-multipoint LPT
l Switching duration:
300 ms if the fault is on the NNI side and is detected using PW
OAM
300 ms at an optical port and 3s at an electrical port if the
fault is on the UNI side
System
13
Ite
m
Description
LAG Complies with the IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX standards.
l LAG protection
l A maximum of 16 LAGs. Each LAG has a maximum of eight
members.
l Switching duration:
Manual/Static LAG: 50 ms at an optical port and 2s at an
electrical port if the link is interrupted bidirectionally
Static LAG: 3s if the link is interrupted unidirectionally
ML-PPP Complies with the IETF RFC 1661 and IETF RFC 1990 standards.
l Total number of PPP links: 504
l Number of ML-PPP groups: 64
l Number of member links in an ML-PPP group: 16
LMSP Complies with the ITU-T G.841 and ITU-T G.842 standards.
l Number of protection groups: 8
l Protection switching time: 50 ms
Mai
nten
ance
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
OAM
Complies with the ITU-T Y.1711 and ITU-T G.8113.1 standards.
l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM
l MPLS OAM: supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Ping, and Traceroute.
l MPLS-TP OAM: supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, PW LM, LCK,
TST (packet loss test only), PW CSF, and two-way DM.
l Maximum sum of the number of tunnels supporting OAM and the
number of PWs supporting OAM: 128
NOTE
MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW
OAM, ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM (one MRPS ring uses two OAM resources)
share resources.
System
14
Ite
m
Description
ETH
OAM
Complies with the IEEE 802.3ah and IEEE 802.1ag standards.
l Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC), loopback
(LB), linktrace (LT), alarm indication signal (AIS), loss
measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM).
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, fault detection, remote loopback, and self-
loop detection and looped-port blocking.
l Maximum number of MDs/MAs/MEP/MIPs: 64
NOTE
l MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP
PW OAM, ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM (one MRPS ring uses two OAM
resources) share resources.
l Only the E-Line service transmitted in native Ethernet mode supports ETH-
LM and ETH-DM.
l LM/DM are based on IEEE 802.1ag, implemented by referring to the ITU-T
Y.1731 standard.
MRPS
OAM
Complies with the ITU-T G.8113.1 standard.
Supports CC and RDI.
NOTE
MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW
OAM, ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM (one MRPS ring uses two OAM resources)
share resources.
ATM
OAM
Supports the following ATM OAM functions: CC, LB, RDI, and AIS.
RMON Supports port-level and service-level RMON functions, in compliance
with RFC 1757 and RFC 2819. Supports four RMON management
groups: Ethernet statistics group, Ethernet history group, and Ethernet
history control group.
Port level:
l Basic Ethernet performance
l Extended Ethernet performance
Service level:
l L2VPN (private line service)
l Transit tunnel
l PW
SNMP Queries port information and port/service performance statistics using
a standard SNMP terminal.
System
15
Ite
m
Description
Port
mirroring
Supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service analysis and
service fault diagnosis without affecting the services.
l Supports local port mirroring.
l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port.
l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports.
l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress direction
of a UNI port.
Syn
chro
niza
tion
Synchrono
us
Ethernet
l Synchronous Ethernet clock that complies with ITU-T G.8261 and
ITU-T G.8262.
l Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks: FE/GE/
10GE
l Clock source selection algorithm based on the synchronization status
message (SSM) protocol
l Clock frequency stability (holdover mode): < 50 ppb
NOTE
SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
When working in 10BASE-T mode, FE/GE ports do not support synchronous
Ethernet clocks.
IEEE
1588v2
l Supports the OC, BC, TC, and BC+TC clock models. The TC model
can work in two modes: E2E TC and P2P TC.
l Supports the delay deviation compensation for line transmission in
two modes: length deviation compensation and time deviation
compensation. The length deviation compensation value ranges from
0 m to 12000 m, and the time deviation compensation value ranges
from 0 ns to 65535 ns.
l Supports two 1PPS+ToD or DCLS external time ports, which use
the RS-422 level. Each port supports compensation for propagation
delay on its connected cable. The compensation can be set to a value
ranging from 0 s to 10 s in steps of 10 ns or less. ToD supports
cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs).
l Supports the setting of the input/output mode at time ports.
NOTE
A port in 10GE WAN mode does not support IEEE 1588v2.
IEEE 1588
ACR
l The IEEE 1588 ACR slave recovers synchronous clocks from IEEE
1588 packets.
l The quality level of IEEE 1588 ACR clocks can be converted into
that of synchronous Ethernet clocks.
NOTE
A port in 10GE WAN mode does not support IEEE 1588 ACR.
System
16
Ite
m
Description
CES ACR l Supports the clock recovery function in absolute mode.
l Maximum number of CES ACR clocks: 24
l The clock performance complies with the ITU-T G.823 Traffic
template.
Oth
ers
QoS l DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service
classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by packets.
l Complex traffic classification
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-
VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs
+ C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP
values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies.
l Access control list (ACL) policy
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by
a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI
ingresses.
l Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized
queue, or traffic flow.
l Congestion management
Supports tail drop and WRED dropping.
l Queue scheduling policies
Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.

Table 2-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features
Item Description
Service Service Category Maximum
Receiving
Capability
Service Port
System
17
Item Description
SDH service 26xSTM-1 l S-1.1,
L-1.1, and
L-1.2
optical
ports
l STM-1
SFP
electrical
ports
l Optical
port: LC
l Electrical
port: SAA
straight
female
14xSTM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1
and L-4.2
optical ports
LC
2xSTM-16 S-16.1, L-16.1
and L-16.2
optical ports
LC
PDH service 252xE1/T1 E1 (75/120-
ohm)/T1
(100-ohm)
electrical
ports
Anea 96
18xE3/T3 E3 (75-ohm)/
T3 (75-ohm)
electrical
ports
SMB
Ethernet service:
l Ethernet private line
(EPL) services
l Ethernet virtual private
line (EVPL) services
l Ethernet private LAN
(EPLAN) services
(based on the IEEE
802.1d bridge)
LAN (EVPLAN)
services (based on the
IEEE 802.1q and
802.1ad bridges)
l FE optical
port: 24
l FE
electrical
port: 48
l FE optical
port:
100BASE-
BX,
100BASE-
FX,
100BASE-
LX,
100BASE-
VX, and
100BASE-
ZX
l FE
electrical
port:
10/100BA
SE-T(X)
l Optical
port: LC
l Electrical
port: RJ45
System
18
Item Description
24xGE l GE optical
port:
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
VX/ZX
l GE
electrical
port:
1000BAS
E-T
l Optical
port: LC
l Electrical
port: RJ45
TDM
network-
level
protection
SNCP l SNCP at the VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 levels
l Switching duration: 50 ms
Ring MSP l Ring MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels
Linear MSP l Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels
l Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 linear MSP protection
groups: 13
Maintena
nce
PRBS Supported
Port
mirroring
EFS8/EGS4 supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet
service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the
services.
l Supports ingress and egress port mirroring.
Synchroni
zation
Physical
layer clocks
l Including external clocks, line clocks, tributary clocks, and
internal clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms
(a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port).
l Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard
SSM, and extended SSM protocols
l Tributary retiming of tributary clocks
l Locked mode, holdover mode, and free-run mode
System
19
Item Description
Synchronous
Ethernet
EGS4 supports synchronous Ethernet clocks.
l Synchronous Ethernet clock that complies with ITU-T G.
8261 and ITU-T G.8262.
l Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks:
FE/GE
l Clock source selection algorithm based on the
synchronization status message (SSM) protocol
l Clock frequency stability (trace mode): < 50 ppb
NOTE
System
20
3 System Architecture and Service Access
About This Chapter
The chapter describes the equipment's system architecture and service access.
3.1 System Architecture
The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (time division multiplexing [TDM] and packet domains)
device. This section describes its functional units and the relationship between these units.
3.2 Service Types
This section describes the maximum service access capabilities, service ports, and boards
providing specific service types for the OptiX OSN 550.
System
Product Description 3 System Architecture and Service Access
21
3.1 System Architecture
The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (time division multiplexing [TDM] and packet domains)
device. This section describes its functional units and the relationship between these units.
The OptiX OSN 550 consists of the following functional units: service interface unit, TDM
cross-connect unit, packet switching unit, system control and communication unit, clock unit,
auxiliary interface unit, fan unit, and power supply unit.
Figure 3-1 System architecture of OptiX OSN 550
Synchronous/Asynchronous data
External alarm
System control and
communication unit
-48 V/-60 V DC
Orderwire
Ethernet
signal
VC-4
signal
Packet service
External clock
110 V/220 V AC
TDM service
Service
interface
unit
TDM
cross-
connect
unit
Packet
switching
unit
NMS
DCN
Clock
unit
Fan
unit
Power
supply
unit
Control and communication bus & Clock bus
Cross-connect bus Optical/Electrical service
Auxiliary
interface
unit
Backplane

System
22
Table 3-1 Function units of the OptiX OSN 550
Function Unit Function
Service interface
unit
Packet services:
l Receives/Transmits TDM E1/channelized STM-1 signals.
l Receives/Transmits ATM/inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA)
E1 signals.
l Receives/Transmits FE/GE/10GE signals.
TDM services:
l Receives/Transmits E1/T1/E3/T3 signals.
l Receives/Transmits STM-1/4/16 signals.
l Receives/Transmits FE/GE signals.
TDM cross-connect
unit
l Provides the cross-connect function and grooms TDM services.
Packet switching
unit
l Processes Ethernet services and forwards packets.
l Processes MPLS labels and forwards packets.
l Processes PW labels and forwards packets.
System control and
communication unit
l Performs system communication and control.
l Configures and manages the system.
l Collects alarms and monitors performance.
l Processes overhead bytes.
Clock unit l Traces clock sources and provides clock signals for the system.
l Provides the input/output port for external clocks.
Auxiliary interface
unit
l Provides the orderwire phone port.
l Provides the synchronous/asynchronous data port.
l Provides the external alarm input/output port.
Power supply unit l Connects to -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies.
l Connects to 110 V to 220 V AC power supplies.
Fan unit l Cools the NE.

3.2 Service Types
This section describes the maximum service access capabilities, service ports, and boards
providing specific service types for the OptiX OSN 550.
3.2.1 Types of Supported Services
Different boards providing a wide variety of service ports can be deployed on the OptiX OSN
550.
System
23
Table 3-2 lists the services supported by the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 3-2 Types of supported services
Servi
ce
Cate
gory
Service
Type
Service
Rate
Board Reference Standard
Packe
t
10 GE LAN
service
10.31 Gbit/s PCXLX/PCXX/EX1 IEEE 802.3ae
10 GE
WAN
service
9.95 Gbit/s PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
GE service
(optical
port)
1000 Mbit/s PCXLG/PCXGA/
PCXGB/EM6F/EG4C
IEEE 802.3z
GE service
(electrical
port)
1000 Mbit/s EM6T/EM6F/EG4C
FE service
(optical
port)
100 Mbit/s EF8F/EM6F/EG4C IEEE 802.3u
FE service
(electrical
port)
10/100
Mbit/s
EF8F/EM6T/EM6F
ATM/IMA/
E1 CES
service
2.048 Mbit/
s
MD1 ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.823
Channelize
d STM-1
CES service
155.52
Mbit/s
CQ1 ITU-T G.957
ITU-T G.703
SDH STM-1
standard
service
155.52
Mbit/s
SL1D/SL1Q/PCXLX/
PCXLG/CXL1
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.691
ITU-T G.957
ITU-T G.693
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.825
STM-4
standard or
concatenati
on service
622.08
Mbit/s
SL4D/PCXLX/PCXLG/
CXL4
STM-16
standard or
concatenati
on service
2.5 Gbit/s PCXLX/PCXLG/
CXL16
System
24
Servi
ce
Cate
gory
Service
Type
Service
Rate
Board Reference Standard
PDH E1 service 2.048 Mbit/
s
SP3D ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.742
T1 service 1.544 Mbit/
s
SP3D ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.823
ITU-T G.824
ITU-T G.783
T3 service 44.736
Mbit/s
PL3T ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.824
E3 service 34.368
Mbit/s
PL3T ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.823
EoS FE service 10/100
Mbit/s
EFS8/EGS4 IEEE 802.3u
GE service 1000 Mbit/s EGT1/EGS4 IEEE 802.3z
FE: Fast Ethernet
GE: Gigabit Ethernet

3.2.2 Access Capacities
This section describes access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing
boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550.
Access Capacity in Packet Mode
Table 3-3 lists access capacities in packet mode when different system control, switching, and
timing boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 3-3 Access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in packet mode
Board 10GE
(Optica
l Port)
GE
(Optica
l Port)
GE
(Electri
cal Port)
FE
(Optica
l Port)
FE
(Electri
cal Port)
ATM/
IMA/E1
CES
Channe
lized
STM-1
CES
PCXLX 4 20 20 48 48 192 24
System
25
Board 10GE
(Optica
l Port)
GE
(Optica
l Port)
GE
(Electri
cal Port)
FE
(Optica
l Port)
FE
(Electri
cal Port)
ATM/
IMA/E1
CES
Channe
lized
STM-1
CES
PCXX 4 20 20 48 48 192 24
PCXLG 2 22 20 48 48 192 24
PCXGA 0 22 20 48 48 192 24
PCXGB 2 22 20 48 48 192 24

Access Capacity in TDM Mode
Table 3-4 lists access capacities in TDM mode when different system control, switching, and
timing boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 3-4 Access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM mode
Board STM-1 STM-4 STM-1
6
E1/T1 E3/T3 FE
(Optic
al
Port)
FE
(Electr
ical
Port)
GE
PCXL
X
26 14 2 252 18 24 48 24
PCXX 24 12 0 252 18 24 48 24
PCXL
G
26 14 2 252 18 24 48 24
PCXG
A
24 12 0 252 18 24 48 24
PCXG
B
24 12 0 252 18 24 48 24
CXL1 26 12 0 252 18 24 48 24
CXL4 24 14 0 252 18 24 48 24
CXL16 24 12 2 252 18 24 48 24
System
26
4 Product Features
About This Chapter
This chapter describes equipment features in terms of available service types, protection, and
synchronization.
4.1 Services Supported
The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet services, ATM/IMA/E1 services, channelized STM-1,
EoS services, SDH services, and PDH services.
4.2 Redundancy and Protection
The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiple redundancy and protection schemes.
4.3 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 550 supports IEEE 1588v2, synchronous Ethernet clock, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit/
s clocks and can provide an end-to-end clock transport solution when deployed with MSTP or
PTN products.
System
Product Description 4 Product Features
27
4.1 Services Supported
The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet services, ATM/IMA/E1 services, channelized STM-1,
EoS services, SDH services, and PDH services.
4.1.1 Service Overview (Packet)
This section describes the packet service types supported by the equipment.
Ethernet Services (E-Line and E-LAN)
The OptiX OSN 550 supports point-to-point E-Line services and multipoint-to-multipoint E-
LAN services.
Standardization organizations such as ITU-T, IETF and MEF stipulate the model frames for L2
Ethernet services. Table 4-1 lists these model frames. In this document, the L2 Ethernet services
are of the model frame stipulated by MEF.
Table 4-1 Comparison among L2 Ethernet services stipulation
Service Type Service
Multiplex
ing
Transport
Tunnel
IETF
Model
ITU-T
Model
MEF
Model
Poin
t-to-
poin
t
serv
ice
Line Physically
isolated
Physically
isolated
- EPL E-Line
Virtual
Line
VLAN VLAN - EVPL
MPLS VPWS
Mul
tipoi
nt-
to-
mult
ipoi
nt
serv
ice
LAN Physically
isolated
Physically
isolated
- EPLAN E-LAN
Virtual
LAN
VLAN Physically
isolated
- EVPLAN
VLAN -
MPLS VPLS

Table 4-2 lists the E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the OptiX OSN 550.
System
28
Table 4-2 E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the OptiX OSN 550
Service Service Type
E-Line Native Ethernet
services
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service
VLAN-based E-Line services
QinQ-based E-Line services
ETH PWE3
services
E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
E-LAN Native Ethernet
services
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ETH PWE3
services
E-LAN services carried by PWs (VPLS services)

E-Line Service
Figure 4-1 illustrates the E-Line service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company A has two branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has two branches in City 2 and
City 3. Company C has two branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Companies A, B,
and C require data communication. The OptiX OSN equipment can separately provide a private
line service for Companies A, B, and C to meet the communication requirement. In addition,
the service data is completely isolated.
Figure 4-1 E-Line service
Nationwide/Global
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Company A
City 3 City 1
Company A
E-Line1
E-Line2
E-Line3
Company C Company B
Company C
Company B
City 2
System
29

E-LAN Service
Figure 4-2 illustrates the E-LAN service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company Z is headquartered in City 3. Branch A of the company is located in City 1 and City
2, and Branch B of the company is located in City 1, City 2, and City 3. Branch A and Branch
B do not communicate with each other, and the data of them should be separated from each
other. The headquarters, however, need to communicate with all the branches and need to access
the Internet.
The OptiX OSN equipment can be used to provide the E-LAN service. Different VLAN tags
are used to identify service data from different branches. In this manner, the headquarters can
communicate with the branches and the data from different branches is isolated. In addition, the
VLAN is used to isolate the Internet data accessed by the headquarters from the internal service
data.
Figure 4-2 E-LAN service
Nationwide/Global
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Headquarter
Branch B
City 3
Branch A
City 1
Branch B
Branch A
City 2 VLAN1
VLAN2
Branch B Branch A
ISP
VLAN3

CES Services
The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber
resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across the
pure packet mode.
At the physical layer on the UNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with a CE
through the following physical channels for accessing CES services:
System
30
l Channelized STM-1
l E1
Figure 4-3 Networking diagram of the CES
PSN
PE1 PE2 CE1 CE2
AC AC
(BTS) (BSC)
LSP
Native TDM
service
TDM PWE3
Framed E1
-- --
Idle TS Service TS
Packet transmission equipment
PW
Framed E1 TDM PWE3 packet
Native TDM
service

Emulation Mode
The OptiX NG-SDH series equipment supports two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) CES and structure-agnostic
TDM over packet (SAToP) CES.
In the case of CESoPSN CES:
l The equipment senses the frame format, frame alignment mode, and timeslot information
in the TDM circuit.
l The equipment processes the overheads and extracts the payloads in TDM frames. Then,
the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a certain sequence. As a result, the
services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP CES:
l The equipment does not sense any format in the TDM signal. Instead, it considers TDM
signals as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM signals
is emulated.
l The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
Service Type
CES services are classified into UNI-UNI CES services and UNI-UNI CES services by service
implementation point.
l UNI-UNI CES services
As shown in Figure 4-4, a single OptiX OSN NE completes access of TDM services.
System
31
Figure 4-4 UNI-UNI CES services
BTS
BSC
TDM link
NE
PSN

l UNI-NNI CES services
As shown in Figure 4-5, the OptiX OSN NEs set UNI-NNI CES services. In the case of a
UNI-NNI CES service, the OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through E1
ports; CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate end-to-end TDM
services.
Figure 4-5 UNI-NNI CES services
BTS2
BSC
BTS1
TDM link
NE
NE
NE
PSN
Tunnel
PW

ATM/IMA Services
The OptiX OSN equipment supports ATM/IMA services in packet mode.
ATM Services
ATM stands for asynchronous transfer mode, which is implemented based on cells. In ATM
mode, the ATM PWE3 technology is used to emulate ATM services on a packet switched
System
32
network (PSN). Therefore, traditional ATM services can traverse the PSN. ATM service
networks can be classified into three types: one-to-one, N-to-one or ATM-TRANS, according
to the encapsulation mode of ATM PWE3 packets.
Figure 4-6 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in one-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
PSN
PE1 PE2
1-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service
ATM PWE3
LSP
PW
AC
AC
CE2 CE1
NodeB
RNC
1-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service

Figure 4-7 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in N-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
PSN
PE1 PE2
N-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service
ATM PWE3
LSP
PW
AC
AC
CE4 CE2
CE1
CE3
NodeB
RNC
N-to-1 ATM
PWE3
service

System
33
NOTE
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a PW must be the same.
IMA Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology multiplexes multiple low-speed ATM
links into a high-speed link.
The IMA technology provides inverse multiplexing of an ATM cell stream over multiple low-
speed links and retrieves the original stream at the far-end from these physical links. Figure
4-8 shows how IMA transmits services.
Figure 4-8 IMA transmission
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3
IMA group
ATM cell stream ATM cell stream

The IMA technology helps to group multiple physical links to form a higher bandwidth logical
link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. When the member links in the IMA
group are dynamically added/deleted, or fail/recover, the logical link changes only in bandwidth.
The services on the logical link are not interrupted only when the bandwidth of the logical link
is not lower than the required minimum bandwidth.
With the IMA technology, the transport network can transmit ATM services from customer
equipment on an IMA group formed by multiple low-speed links (for example, the three E1 links
shown in Figure 4-9), therefore increasing link bandwidth utilization and providing link
protection.
Figure 4-9 Application of the IMA technology
IMA group
NodeB
E1 link
Packet transmit equipment
4.1.2 Service Overview (TDM)
This section describes the TDM service types supported by the equipment.
System
34
Ethernet Services (EPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN)
ETH OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly supports service
continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l EPL Service
l EVPL Service
l EPLAN Service
l EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown
in Figure 4-10, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node
through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-
healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.
Figure 4-10 EPL service based on port
VCTRUNK 1
PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
POTR1
A
NE 1 NE 2
B
PORT2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
A
B

EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 4-11, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according
to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Company A. The
two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
System
35
Figure 4-11 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters of
company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
NE 1 NE 2
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
Department 1
Department 2

l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN equipment adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 4-12.
EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 4-13.
EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-12 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
Community
user
Cyber cafe
user
OptiX OSN
equipment
VCTRUNK
A
A'
NE 1 NE 2
B
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN100
VLAN200
1 PORT2
1
PORT
PORT
PORT2
B'

System
36
Figure 4-13 EVPL service based on MPLS
NE 1 NE 2
P PE
P PE
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1 PORT1
PORT2
`
Add label
Department B
Department
A
Branch 1
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Strip label
Branch 2
Department B
Department A

Figure 4-14 EVPL service based on QinQ
Departme
nt B
Departm
ent A
NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1 PORT1
PORT2
`
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Add label Strip label
Branch 1
Branch 2
Department B
Department A

EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a
bandwidth, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching
of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control
(MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets are
transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as shown
in Figure 4-15.
System
37
Figure 4-15 EPLAN service
NE 1
NE 2
NE3
1
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
PORT1 VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3 of
company A
Port 1
Department 1 of
company A
Access
point
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 1
Department 2 of
company A

EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same
VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed
into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the
service requirements.
As shown in Figure 4-16, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN equipment adopt
VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
System
38
Figure 4-16 EVPLAN service
NE 1
NE 2
NE3
PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
LSP
LSP PORT1
PORT2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
1
P
O
R
T
1
P
O
R
T
2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
2
S-Aware S-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3
of company B
Department 3
of company A
Port 2
Port 1
Port 1
Port 2
Department 2
of company B
Department 2
of company A Department 1
of company B
Department 1
of company A
Acess
point
Company A Company B
OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 2
C-Aware

SDH/PDH Service
This section describes the service support in TDM mode.
The OptiX OSN 550 can process SDH services and PDH services. Table 4-3 lists the service
categories that the OptiX OSN 550 supports in TDM mode.
Table 4-3 Service categories that the OptiX OSN 550 supports in TDM mode
Service
Category
Description
SDH service l Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
l Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c
l Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X8),
VC-3-Xv (X24), VC-12-Xv (X63)
PDH service E1/T1 and E3/T3 services

System
39
4.2 Redundancy and Protection
The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiple redundancy and protection schemes.
4.2.1 Equipment Level Protection
The equipment supports several equipment level protection schemes.
Power Redundancy
1+1 backup for power supply: two channels of -48 V DC power supplies are connected by using
two PIU boards for backup.
As shown in Figure 4-17, the OptiX OSN 550 is configured with a pair of DC power supplies
for backup. Normal operations are not affected if any external -48 V DC power supply fails.
Figure 4-17 DC power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
P
I
U
P
I
U
F
A
N
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Mutual backup DC input

As shown in Figure 4-18, the OptiX OSN 550 is configured with a pair of AC power supplies
for backup. Normal operations are not affected if any external 100 V/240 V AC power supply
fails.
Figure 4-18 AC power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis
SLOT 1
SLOT 3
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
S
L
O
T
9
1
S
L
O
T

9
2
S
L
O
T

9
3
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
APIU APIU
Mutual backup AC input

System Control, Switching, and Timing Board Redundancy
The equipment provides 1+1 backup between the active and standby system control, switching,
and timing boards.
System
40
Figure 4-19 Board redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis (system control, switching, and
timing board)
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
P
I
U
P
I
U
F
A
N
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
1+1 backup between
active and standby

Fan Redundancy
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system. The failure of a single fan does
not affect the operation of other fans.
4.2.2 Network Level Protection (Packet)
This section describes packet domain protection schemes.
PW APS
This section defines PW APS and describes its purpose.
Definition
PW APS is a function that protects PWs based on the APS protocol. When the working PW is
faulty, PW APS switches services to a preconfigured protection PW.
The PW APS function supported by the OptiX OSN equipment has the following features:
l End-to-end protection for PWs.
l The working PW and protection PW are carried in different tunnels but have the same local
and remote PEs.
l The protection PW in the PW APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic.
l The PW OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1711) or MPLS-TP OAM (based on ITU-T G.8113.1)
mechanism is used to detect faults in PWs, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS
protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose
PW APS improves the reliability of service transmission in PWs.
As shown in Figure 4-20, when the PW OAM mechanism detects a fault in the working PW,
services are switched to the protection PW for transmission.
System
41
Figure 4-20 Example of PW APS
PE1
PE2
PE3
Protect switching
PE1
PE4
PE2
PE3
Service
Working PW
Protection PW
Working PW
Protection PW
PE4

Tunnel APS
This section defines tunnel APS and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
Tunnel APS is a function that protects tunnels based on the APS protocol. When the working
tunnel is faulty, tunnel APS switches services to a preconfigured protection tunnel.
Tunnel APS supported by the OptiX OSN equipment has the following features:
l Provides end-to-end protection for tunnels.
l The working tunnel and protection tunnel have the same ingress and egress nodes.
System
42
l The protection tunnel in the Tunnel APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic.
l The MPLS OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1711) or MPLS-TP OAM (based on ITU-T G.8113.1)
mechanism is used to detect faults in tunnels, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange
APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose
Tunnel APS is used to improve the reliability of service transmission over tunnels. Tunnel APS
is used in two typical scenarios: co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels, and co-sourced tunnels with
different sinks. Figure 4-21 and Figure 4-22 show the typical application scenarios.
For co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels, a tunnel APS protection group is created between PE1
and PE2. Generally, services are transmitted on the working tunnel. When the working tunnel
is faulty, APS occurs and the services are switched to the protection tunnel.
Figure 4-21 Typical application of tunnel APS (for co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels)
NodeB
RNC
PE1
Tunnel APS
PE2
NodeB
Tunnel1
PSN
Tunnel APS
Tunnel2
Working Tunnel
Protection Tunnel

For co-sourced tunnels with different sinks, tunnel APS works with MC-LAG to implement
cross-equipment protection. As shown in Figure 4-22, PE1 is an access-layer NE, and PE2 and
PE3 are NEs at the backbone convergence layer. A tunnel APS protection group is created
between PE1 and PE2 and between PE1 and PE3. Generally, services are transmitted on the
working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty, APS occurs and the services are switched
to the protection tunnel.
System
43
Figure 4-22 Typical application of tunnel APS (for co-sourced tunnels with different sinks)
NodeB
PE1
PE3
PE2
MC-LAG
RNC
PSN
Tunnel APS A
S
Working Tunnel
Multi-chassis synchronous communication
Active (carrying services)
Standby (not carrying services)
Protection Tunnel
A
S

MRPS
This section defines MRPS and describes its purpose.
Definition
As shown in Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24, MRPS protects packet services on ring topologies
by switching the services to the prepared protection channel when the working channel fails.
System
44
Figure 4-23 Application of MRPS scenario 1
RNC
NodeB
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
RNC
NodeB
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5

System
45
Figure 4-24 Application of MRPS scenario 2
RNC
NodeB
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
NE7
RNC
NodeB
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
NE7

Purposes and Benefits
MRPS provides the following unique benefits:
l Saving tunnel resources.
MRPS uses less tunnel resources because it only requires configuring working tunnels for
services.
l Saving equipment processing resources and bandwidth resources.
MRPS requires that each node use two OAM instances and two ring APS instances.
Quantities of OAM instances and APS instances are independent of service quantities.
Therefore, MRPS consumes less equipment processing resources and bandwidth resources.
l Reducing configuration and maintenance workload.
After a node is added to the protection channel of MRPS, you only need to configure the
new node.
System
46
l Enhancing protection reliability.
MRPS protects services against a link failure or several nodes failure.
ERPS
Ethernet technologies are applied more widely than ever before, and ring networking using
packet Ethernet boards is more and more deployed. Under the context, Ethernet ring protection
switching (ERPS) can be used to protect LAN services on packet Ethernet ring networks.
When an Ethernet ring network is configured with ERPS, under normal conditions, the ring
protection link (RPL) owner node blocks its port on a certain side so that services are transmitted
through the port on the other side. In this manner, service loops are prevented. If a ring link or
a ring node fails, the RPL owner unblocks the preceding port and then the services are transmitted
through the unblocked port.
ERPS has the following characteristics in its implementation:
l Specifies an RPL and blocks its ports to prevent loops.
l Defines R-APS messages to transmit ring network status information so as to ensure
consistent protection operations performed on ring nodes.
Figure 4-25 shows networking of a single Ethernet ring protection (ERP) ring.
Figure 4-25 A single ERP ring
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
1
2
3
4 Topology
Protection
switching
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
1
2
3
4 Topology
Link down
RPL RPL
Blocked port
Ethernet service direction
RPL
owner node
RPL neighbor
node
RPL neighbor
node
RPL
owner node

As shown in Figure 4-25, NE4 is the RPL owner node and NE1 is a neighbor node. The link
between NE1 and NE4 is the RPL.
l Under normal conditions, NE4 blocks the port connected to NE1, and NE1 also blocks the
port connected to NE4
a
. Services are transmitted along the route NE1 <-> NE2 <-> NE3
<-> NE4.
l If the link between NE1 and NE2 fails, NE4 and NE1 unblock their ports so that services
can be transmitted along the route NE1 <-> NE4 <-> NE3 <-> NE2.
NOTE
a: If ERPS V1 is used, NE1 does not block the port connected to NE4.
Figure 4-26 shows networking of tangent ERP rings.
System
47
Figure 4-26 Tangent ERP rings
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
1
2
3
4
topology
NE 5
NE 6
NE 7
3
5
6
7
topology
Protection
switching
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
1
2
3
4
topology
NE 5 NE 7
3
5
6
7
topology
RPL
RPL
RPL
RPL
NE 6
ERP ring
1
ERP ring
2
ERP ring
1
ERP ring
2
Link down
Blocked port
RPL
owner node
RPL neighbor
node
RPL neighbor
node
RPL neighbor
node
RPL neighbor
node
RPL
owner node
RPL
owner node
RPL
owner node

As shown in Figure 4-26, ERP ring 1 is tangent to ERP ring 2 at NE3. On ERP ring 1. NE4 is
the RPL owner node and NE1 is a neighbor node. The link between NE1 and NE4 is the RPL
link. On ERP ring 2, NE6 is the RPL owner node and NE7 is a neighbor node. The link between
NE6 and NE7 is the RPL.
l Under normal conditions:
On ERP ring 1, NE4 blocks the port connected to NE1, and NE1 also blocks the port
connected to NE4. Services are transmitted along the route NE1 <-> NE2 <-> NE3 <-
> NE4.
On ERP ring 2, NE6 blocks the port connected to NE7, and NE7 also blocks the port
connected to NE6. Services are transmitted along the route NE7 <-> NE3 <-> NE5 <-
> NE6.
l If the link between NE1 and NE2 fails:
On ERP ring 1, NE4 and NE1 unblock their ports so that services can be transmitted
along the route NE1 <-> NE4 <-> NE3 <-> NE2.
On ERP ring 2, ports connecting NE6 and NE7 are still blocked, and services are
transmitted along the route NE7 <-> NE3 <-> NE5 <-> NE6.
Figure 4-27 shows networking of interconnected ERP rings.
Figure 4-27 Interconnected ERP rings
RPL
2
6 5
3
NE 1 NE 2
NE 3 NE 4
NE 5 RPL
1
2 3
4
RPL
2
6 5
3
NE 1 NE 2
NE 3 NE 4
NE 5 NE 5 RPL
1
2 3
4
Protection
switching
Link down
Blocked port
RPL neighbor
node
RPL
owner node
RPL
owner node
RPL neighbor
node
topology
ERP ring
1
topology
ERP ring
2
RPL neighbor
node
RPL
owner node
RPL
owner node
RPL neighbor
node
topology
ERP ring
1
topology
ERP ring
2
System
48

As shown in Figure 4-27, ERP ring 1 and ERP ring 2 are interconnected at NE3 and NE4. On
ERP ring 1, NE2 is the RPL owner node and NE1 is a neighbor node. The link between NE1
and NE2 is the RPL. On ERP ring 2, NE5 is the RPL owner node and NE6 is a neighbor node.
The link between NE5 and NE6 is the RPL.
l Under normal conditions: On ERP ring 1, NE2 blocks the port connected to NE1, and NE1
also blocks the port connected to NE2. Services are transmitted along the route NE2 <->
NE4 <-> NE3 <-> NE1. On ERP ring 2, NE5 blocks the port connected to NE6, and NE6
also blocks the port connected to NE5. Services are transmitted along the route NE1 <->
NE3 <-> NE4 <-> NE2.
l If the link between NE1 and NE3 fails: On ERP ring 1, NE1 and NE2 unblock their ports
so that services can be transmitted along the route NE1 <-> NE2 <-> NE4 <-> NE3. On
ERP ring 2, ports connecting NE5 and NE6 are still blocked, and services are transmitted
along the route NE3 <-> NE5 <-> NE6 <-> NE4.
LAG
As the Ethernet technology is widely applied in the metropolitan area network (MAN) and the
wide area network (WAN), carriers propose increasingly higher requirements on the bandwidth
and reliability of access links that use the Ethernet technology. Hardware upgrades can increase
Ethernet link bandwidth but also incur high expenditure. In addition, hardware upgrades are less
flexible than software upgrades. To increase bandwidth at a low expenditure and flexibly, the
link aggregation technology is developed.
Link aggregation has the following characteristics:
l With no need for hardware upgrades, link aggregation binds several Ethernet ports as a
higher-bandwidth logical port.
l The link backup mechanism of the link aggregation technology provides higher link
transmission reliability.
l Link aggregation functions between adjacent NEs and is independent of the network
topology.
The logical link aggregating several physical links is called a link aggregation group (LAG).
NOTE
Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because each link corresponds to two specific ports at two
ends in Ethernet transmission.
As shown in Figure 4-28, two adjacent NEs are interconnected through three pairs of Ethernet
ports. Three physical Ethernet links are bound as a logical link, called a LAG.
Figure 4-28 LAG
Ethernet
packet
Link 1
LAG
Link 2
Link 3 Ethernet
packet
System
49

LPT
This section defines LPT and provides the purpose of this feature.
Definition
Link-state pass through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service
network and then instructs the equipment at both ends of the network to switch to a backup
network. LPT ensures normal data transmission. As shown in Figure 4-29, LPT-enabled NE1
and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access
link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. When router A and router B detect a link fault
between them, they immediately switch to the backup network.
Figure 4-29 Typical application of LPT
NE1 NE2
Access link 1
Access link 2
Router A
Router B
Service network
Backup network
Working link
Protection link

Purpose
LPT enabled access equipment detects link faults and immediately switches to a backup network.
MSTP
This topic defines MSTP and describes the purpose of this feature.
Definition
The spanning tree protocol (STP) is used in network loops. This protocol uses algorithms to
break a loop network into a loop-free tree network to prevent packets from cycling endlessly in
the loop network. See Figure 4-30.
System
50
Figure 4-30 Diagram of the STP
Switch A
Root: Switch A
Switch B Switch C
Switch A
Switch B Switch C

The rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is an optimized version of STP. RSTP stabilizes
network topology more quickly than STP. RSTP is compatible with STP. STP packets and RSTP
packets can be differentiated by the bridge that uses the RSTP for calculating the spanning tree.
Compared with STP and RSTP, MSTP maximizes link bandwidth usage by setting up several
independent spanning trees.
Purpose
STP/RSTP meets the following requirements:
l Any activated bridge topology can be configured as a single spanning tree. Redundant data
loops between two stations in a network topology should be removed.
l The spanning tree topology can be configured to protect against bridge faults or route
interruptions. Temporary data loops can be prevented by automatically accepting the
bridges and bridge ports of the bridges that are newly added into the LAN.
l A topology that has been activated can be predicted and repeated. In addition, the topology
can be selected by managing algorithm parameters.
l Operations to the end stations are transparent. For example, the end stations do not know
whether they are attached to a single LAN or a bridged LAN.
l A small part of the available link bandwidth is used to create and maintain a spanning tree.
Bandwidth does not increase with the expanding network scale.
STP/RSTP have shortcomings that have become apparent as VLAN technology has developed.
After the STP/RSTP is enabled, a loop network is broken into a single spanning tree and the
blocked links do not carry any traffic. This wastes bandwidth.
MSTP has fixed this defect in STP and RSTP in addition to stabilizing the network topology.
MSTP provides a load sharing mechanism that enables the traffic of different VLANs to be
transmitted over their respective trails.
l MSTP divides a switching network into different regions, called MST regions. Multiple
spanning trees that are independent of each other exist in each region. Each spanning tree
is called a multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI).
l When MSTP is enabled, VLAN mapping tables specify the mapping relationships between
VLANs and MSTIs. Each VLAN in an MST region corresponds to one MSTI and only this
System
51
MSTI can transmit data for this VLAN. One MSTI, however, may be mapped to multiple
VLANs.
Consider the network in Figure 4-31 as an example. VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 packets are
transmitted over the network. When STP/RSTP is enabled, a single spanning tree that uses switch
A as the root switch is generated and the links between switch B and switch C are blocked.
Hence, the bandwidth of this link is not utilized.
Figure 4-31 Limitations of the STP/RSTP
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
Spanning tree
Root switch
Host A
Host B Host C
Blocked port
VLAN 1
VLAN 2

If MSTP is enabled and this network is an MST region, then VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 are each
mapped to an MSTI. Figure 4-32 shows the network topology. On the ring:
l MSTI 1 uses switch A as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 1.
l MSTI 2 uses switch C as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 2.
Different VLANs are forwarded over different trails and all VLAN packets are forwarded
correctly. Load sharing is achieved.
System
52
Figure 4-32 MSTP improvement
MSTI 2 -> VLAN 2
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
Host A
Host B Host C
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
VLAN 1 VLAN 1
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
VLAN 2
MSTI 1 -> VLAN 1
VLAN 2
Root switch

NOTE
The OptiX OSN 500 supports only the MSTP that generates a common and internal spanning tree (CIST). The
OptiX OSN 500 does not support the load sharing function that is forwards packets of different VLANs over
different trails.
As shown in Figure 4-33, when equipment uses two different trails to access the OptiX OSN
equipment, you can configure the OptiX OSN equipment ports connected to the user network
into a port group. This port group, together with a switch on the user network, can run the MSTP.
If a service access link becomes faulty, MSTP generates a spanning tree topology to provide
protection for a user network that is configured with multiple access points.
System
53
Figure 4-33 Typical MSTP scenario on the OptiX OSN equipment
CIST
Root
Root
Port group
Blocked Port

ML-PPP
This section defines ML-PPP and describes the purpose of using this feature on transport
networks.
Definition
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is a link layer protocol based on the Serial Line Interface
Protocol (SLIP). PPP provides a standard method for encapsulating multiple types of protocol
datagrams (including IP, IPX, and AppleTalk) on a point-to-point link.
The Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP) is an extended PPP protocol. It is used to bind
multiple low-rate PPP links into a virtual ML-PPP link. An ML-PPP link is also called a Multilink
Protocol (MP) group. ML-PPP also supports packet splitting and recombination, therefore
effectively reducing the transmission latency and increasing the maximum transfer unit (MTU)
for a link.
Using the ML-PPP function brings a network the following benefits:
l Increased bandwidth
l Load sharing and link backup
l Lower latency
Purpose
ML-PPP links can bear MPLS tunnels so that the MPLS tunnels can traverse a TDM transport
network.
As shown in Figure 4-34, MPLS packets in the MPLS tunnel are encapsulated in E1s and
transmitted over the ML-PPP link through the TDM network. At the TDM network edge, the
MPLS packets are decapsulated from E1s.
System
54
Figure 4-34 Using an ML-PPP link to transmit services through a TDM network
Ingress
FE/GE E1 E1
TDM
network
Transit Transit Egress
MPLS tunnel
Payload Payload
MPLS MPLS
ML-PPP
FE/GE
E1
FE/GE
Payload
MPLS
FE/GE

Linear MSP
The packet-based linear MSP uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic
protection switching and thus to protect services. The OptiX OSN equipment supports 1:1
packet-based linear MSP.
1:1 Packet-based linear MSP
1:1 packet-based linear MSP requires one working path and one protection path. Common
services are transmitted in the working path. When the working path becomes faulty, the service
in this path is switched to the protection path. Figure 4-35 shows the application of 1:1 packet-
based linear MSP.
NOTE
The extra traffic can not be transmitted in the protection path.
System
55
Figure 4-35 1:1 Packet-based linear MSP
Working path
Protection path
NE A NE B
Protection switching
NE A NE B
Common
service
Working path
Protection path
Common
service
Common
service
Common
service

Purpose
The packet-based linear MSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic
protection switching once the working path fails, and thus to protect services.
4.2.3 Network Level Protection (TDM)
This section describes protection schemes in the TDM domain.
LAG
Link aggregation combines multiple links attached to the same equipment into a LAG so that
the bandwidth of the LAG increases and links are made more reliable. The aggregated links are
treated as a single logical link.
A LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that transmits data at a higher
rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. It does not have any impact on
the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because
links have a one-to-one mapping with ports on Ethernet networks.
As shown in Figure 4-36, the LAG provides the following functions:
l Increased bandwidth
LAGs provide users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. By
combining multiple physical links into one logical link, users obtain a logical link with
higher bandwidth without upgrading existing equipment, since the bandwidth of the logical
System
56
link is equal to the sum of the bandwidth of all combined physical links. The aggregation
module uses a load sharing algorithm to share traffic among the combined links.
l Increased availability
The links in a LAG dynamically back up each other. When a link fails, the other links in
the LAG take over. Dynamic backup occurs only among links in the LAG; other links are
not included.
Figure 4-36 Link aggregation group
LAG
Ethernet
packets
Li nk 1
Li nk 2
Li nk 3 Ethernet
packets

DLAG
The DLAG is a protection group that aggregates two corresponding ports on two identical boards.
The DLAG provides 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
As shown in Figure 4-37, a DLAG uses two identical boards. One board functions as the main
board, and the other board functions as the slave board. Two corresponding ports, one port on
the main board and the other port on the slave board, form a DLAG. For example, PORT1 on
the main board and PORT1 on the slave board form the first DLAG. By default, the port on the
main board is in the working state, and the port on the slave board protects the port on the main
board.
System
57
Figure 4-37 DLAG
Main
board
Main communication
equipment
Slave communication
equipment
Main link 1
A
B
C
XCS
Slave
board
PORT1
PORT2
PORT3
PORT4
PORT1
PORT2
PORT3
PORT4
VCG
VCG
Main link 2
Main
link 3
Slave
link 1
Slave
link 2
Slave link 3
Main communication
equipment
Slave communication
equipment
B
Main communication
equipment
Slave communication
equipment

After the DLAG is configured, when the main board detects a link down failure, a board offline
event, or a hardware failure on a port, the cross-connect board switches the services carried by
the failed port from the main board to the slave board to protect the services.
The DLAG provides the following functions:
l Increased link availability
The main port and slave port in a DLAG provide backup to each other dynamically. When
the main link fails, the slave link quickly replaces the failed main link, thus increasing the
availability of the links.
l Reduced the impact of protection switching
When the link on a port fails, only the services on the port are switched to the corresponding
port on the slave board. The services on the other ports that work normally are not switched.
For example, when main link 1 fails, only the services carried by main link 1 are switched
to slave link 1 that is between PORT1 on the slave board and the slave communication
equipment at the opposite end.
l Improved security and convenience in the case of a network upgrade
When you upgrade an NE, you can first upgrade the slave board, then switch the services
from the main board to the slave board, and finally upgrade the main board. In this way,
the services are upgraded without being interrupted.
LCAS
This topic describes the LCAS in terms of background, function definition, and benefits to
networks.
System
58
With the diverse and complex development of the services transmitted in the SDH network, the
demands for various access bandwidths increasingly grow. As a result, the previous monotone
bandwidth (such as a VC-4) no longer meets the requirement. Hence, the concatenation
technology emerges as the times require. Concatenation is classified into adjacent concatenation
and virtual concatenation. The latter is more flexible than the former and enjoys higher
bandwidth utilization than the former does. Both the adjacent concatenation and virtual
concatenation have the following problems:
l When any physical channel fails, all the concatenated channels fail and all services are
interrupted.
l After services are set up, if you adjust the bandwidth of the services, the services are greatly
affected.
The link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) technology emerges as a solution to the preceding
problems. The LCAS improves and complements the virtual concatenation technology. The
LCAS dynamically adjusts the number of virtual containers required for service mapping to
meet the requirements of various service bandwidths. This elevates the bandwidth utilization
and enhances the robustness of virtual concatenation.
NOTE
The LCAS applies to only the virtually concatenated channels.
Adopting the LCAS function brings the network with the following benefits:
l The LCAS dynamically adjusts (adds or deletes) the service bandwidth without affecting
the availability of the existing services.
l When some of the physical channels in a virtual concatenation group fail, with LCAS, the
failed channels are shielded and the other physical channels still transport the services
normally. This prevents the services from being interrupted when some of the physical
channels fail. After the failed physical channels are restored, they can transport services.
LPT
This section defines LPT and provides the purpose of this feature.
Definition
Link-state pass through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service
network and then instructs the equipment at both ends of the network to switch to a backup
network. LPT ensures normal data transmission. As shown in Figure 4-38, LPT-enabled NE1
and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access
link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. When router A and router B detect a link fault
between them, they immediately switch to the backup network.
System
59
Figure 4-38 Typical application of LPT
NE1 NE2
Access link 1
Access link 2
Router A
Router B
Service network
Backup network
Working link
Protection link

Purpose
LPT enabled access equipment detects link faults and immediately switches to a backup network.
Ring MSP
Ring MSP uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) bytes K1 and K2 to implement
automatic protection switching of services.
Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring MSP
On a two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP, one of the bidirectional STM-N lines is the working
line, and the other is the protection line. As shown in Figure 4-39, the services on the two-fiber
unidirectional ring MSP are on diverse routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow
of the services from NE A to NE C is NE ANE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services
from NE C to NE A is NE CNE DNE A.
In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working line. When a fiber cut occurs and the
working line becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both
switched from the working line of the faulty fiber to the protection line of the reverse directional
fiber for transmission. Figure 4-39 shows the application of the two-fiber unidirectional ring
MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE
ANE DNE CNE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A
continues to be NE CNE DNE A.
System
60
Figure 4-39 Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP
Signal flow of services
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East
West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber
unidirectional MSP
ring
Before protection
switching
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber
unidirectional MSP
ring
After protection
switching

Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP
On a two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP, the first half of VC-4s on each STM-N line is allocated
to the working channel, and the other half of VC-4s is allocated to the protection channel. As
shown in Figure 4-40, the services on the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP are on uniform routes.
Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A
NE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE CNE BNE A.
In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working channel. The services transmitted on
two fibers flow in inverse directions. When a fiber cut occurs and the working channel becomes
System
61
unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working
channel of the faulty fiber to the protection channel of the reverse directional fiber for
transmission. Figure 4-40 shows the application of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP. After
the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE ANE D
NE CNE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE CNE
BNE CNE DNE A.
Figure 4-40 Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP
Signal flow of services
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East
West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber
bidirectional MSP
ring
Before protection
switching
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber
bidirectional MSP
ring
After protection
switching

Linear MSP
The linear MSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to realize automatic
protection switching. The OptiX OSN equipment supports 1+1 and 1:N linear MSP.
1+1 Linear MSP
The 1+1 linear MSP requires one working channel and one protection channel. At the source
node, the service is dually fed to the working channel and protection channel. At the sink node,
System
62
the service is received from the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty,
the service is received from the protection channel. Figure 4-41 shows the application of the 1
+1 linear MSP.
Figure 4-41 1+1 linear MSP
Working channel
Protection channel
NE A NE B
Working channel
Protection channel
NE A NE B

NOTE
No extra traffic can be configured in the protection channel in a 1+1 linear MSP group.
1:N linear MSP
The 1:N linear MSP requires N working channels and one protection channel. Common services
are transmitted on the working channels, and extra traffic is transmitted on the protection
channel. When a working channel becomes faulty, the service on the channel is switched to the
protection channel. Therefore, the extra traffic is interrupted. Figure 4-42 shows the application
of the 1:N linear MSP.
System
63
Figure 4-42 1:N linear MSP
Working
channel 1
Protection
channel
NE A NE B
... ...
NE A NE B
... ...
Working
channel N
Working
channel N
Working
channel 1
Protection
channel
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N

Purpose
The LMSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection
switching once the working path fails, and therefore to protect services.
SNCP
SNCP requires one working subnet and one protection subnet so that services can be dually-fed
and selectively-received.
SNCP requires one working subnet and one protection subnet so that services can be dually-fed
and selectively-received. If the working subnet fails to be connected or if its performance fails
to meet requirements, the protection subnet takes over.
Figure 4-43 shows the application of SNCP.
System
64
Figure 4-43 Application of SNCP
Working
SNC
Protection
SNC
Source end
NE A NE B
Sink end
NE A NE B
Protection
switching
Source end Sink end
Working
SNC
Protection
SNC

4.3 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 550 supports IEEE 1588v2, synchronous Ethernet clock, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit/
s clocks and can provide an end-to-end clock transport solution when deployed with MSTP or
PTN products.
When the OptiX OSN 550 uses IEEE 1588v2 to implement phase synchronization, it supports
the following NE clock types: OC, TC, BC and TC+BC.
4.3.1 Requirements for Clock Synchronization
This section describes frequency and phase synchronization requirements of service networks.
A service network, especially a radio access network (RAN), has stringent requirements for
clock synchronization, and clock signals transmitted over a transport network must meet these
requirements.
Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks
Table 4-4 lists clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks based
on the wireless access mode.
System
65
Table 4-4 Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks
Wireless Access Mode Precision of Frequency
Synchronization
Precision of Phase
Synchronization
GSM 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is
not required.
WCDMA 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is
not required.
TD-SCDMA 0.05 ppm 1.5 us
CDMA2000 0.05 ppm 3 us
WiMax FDD 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is
not required.
WiMax TDD 0.011 ppm/3.5G, 7 carrier
wave
1 us
LTE FDD 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is
not required.
LTE TDD 0.05 ppm 1.5 us

Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems
Billing and network management systems also require phase synchronization. Table 4-5 lists
the phase synchronization requirements of some common systems.
Table 4-5 Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems
System Phase Synchronization Precision
Billing system 500 ms
Communication network management
system
500 ms
Signaling system No. 7 1 ms
Positioning system 1 us (equivalent to a positioning precision of
300 m)

4.3.2 Clock and Time Synchronization
This section describes synchronization features including clock synchronization and
synchronous Ethernet clock.
System
66
SDH Synchronization Clocks
Clock synchronization on the entire network helps to transmit services normally.
Definition
Clock: The electronic circuit in a computer that generates a steady stream of timing pulses.
Purpose
Clock synchronization ensures that all the digital devices on a communications network work
at the same nominal frequency, and therefore minimizes the impacts of slips, burst bit errors,
phase jumps, jitters, and wanders on digital communications systems. Clock synchronization
also minimizes pointer justifications on SDH devices. Therefore, clock synchronization is the
precondition and basis for the normal operation of a network.
When all the NEs on the entire network trace clock signals from the same clock source, the
networkwide synchronization is realized.
Generally, an NE can obtain the PRC through several paths. In Figure 4-44, NE4 can trace the
clock from NE3 or the clock from NE5. These two clock sources are from the same PRC.
Figure 4-44 Clock synchronization
NE1
NE6
NE5
NE4
NE3
NE2
BITS
Clock signal flow
System
67

Synchronous Ethernet Clock
The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology that extracts clock signals from serial bit streams
on an Ethernet line, and transmits the extracted clock signals with services to implement the
transfer of the clock signals.
Definition
The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology of frequency synchronization over the physical
layer. The system directly extracts the clock signal from the serial bit stream on the Ethernet
line, and transmits the data to each board by using the clock signal to realize the transfer of clock
information.
Purpose
As SDH networks are evolving into data networks, carrier-level large-scale networks require
synchronous Ethernet to transmit clock signals. The networkwide synchronous transmission idea
of the SDH system needs to be introduced to the Ethernet design. Clock signals are transmitted
from the core to the edge by using the Ethernet physical layer, which ensures synchronization
for all types of real-time services.
In a TDM network or packet network, Figure 4-45 shows the typical network to which
synchronous Ethernet is applied networkwide. BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit clock
signals to NE1 and NE2 through external clock ports. NE1 and NE2 transmit the clock signals
to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals from the convergence layer to access-layer NEs. The
access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner, networkwide clock
synchronization is achieved.
System
68
Figure 4-45 Typical network to which synchronous Ethernet is applied networkwide
2.5 Gbit/s
chain
Access
layer
Convergence
layer
622 Mbit/s
chain
GE
ring
Clock information
OptiX OSN access
equipment
OptiX OSN convergence
equipment
Clock information
Node B
Node B
Node B
BITS1 BITS2
NE1 NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6 NE7
Clock information
155 Mbit/s
chain

In a packet network, Figure 4-46 shows a typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet
and IEEE 1588 ACR. BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit clock signals to Router1 and
Router2 through external clock ports. Because Router1 and Router2 need to transmit the clock
signals to convergence-layer NEs (NE1 and NE2) through a non-transport network, they convert
the clock signals into IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals. After the IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals
traverse the non-transport network and reach NE1 and NE2, the two NEs restore the signals into
synchronous Ethernet clock signals and transmit them to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals
to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner,
networkwide clock synchronization is achieved.
NOTE
Currently, the equipment supports only the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals into synchronous
Ethernet signals.
System
69
Figure 4-46 Typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR
Access
layer
Converge
nce layer
OptiX OSN access
equipment
equipment
Clock information
Clock
information
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Node B
Node B
Node B
BITS1 BITS2
NE1 NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6 NE7
IEEE 1588 ACR
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Clock
information
Router1 Router2

System
70
IEEE 1588v2
This section provides the definition of IEEE 1588v2 and describes its purpose.
Definition
The IEEE 1588v2 defines a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked
Measurement and Control Systems. It defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) to synchronize
independent clocks running on separate nodes of a distributed measurement and control system
to a high degree of accuracy and precision. The IEEE 1588v2 standard supports time
synchronization accuracy in the submicrosecond range.
Synchronization involves clock synchronization (also called frequency synchronization) or time
synchronization. The IEEE 1588v2 standard mainly applicable to time synchronization, and it
can also be used for clock synchronization.
l Clock synchronization
To achieve synchronization of clocks for two devices, the pulses of the clocks must be at
the same frequency and keep a constant phase difference.
l Time synchronization
To achieve time synchronization, the pulses of the clocks must be at the same frequency
and have a very small phase difference as required, and the times indicated by the clocks
must be measured in the same timescale. The commonly used timescales include universal
coordinated time (UTC) and international atomic time (TAI, from the French name Temps
Atomique International).
Purpose
In the applications on transmission networks, the IEEE 1588v2 standard provides an approach
to 1588v2 time synchronization on a network basis, with a synchronization accuracy in the
microsecond range; as well, the IEEE 1588v2 standard helps in transparent transmission of
1588v2 time signals. As such, the IEEE 1588v2 standard, as an alternative to the global
positioning system (GPS) or other complex timing systems, can be used to provide 1588v2 time
for NodeBs or eNodeBs. Figure 4-47 illustrates an application example wherein the IEEE
1588v2 standard helps to synchronize the time of NodeBs distributed in a CDMA2000 or TD-
SCDMA communication system.
System
71
Figure 4-47 Time synchronization of NodeBs implemented by the IEEE 1588v2 standard
RNC
Time
synchronization
PTP node
NodeB NodeB NodeB
BITS
IEEE 1588 ACR
This section defines IEEE 1588 ACR and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) is a technology used to achieve frequency
synchronization between the clock equipment that supports the IEEE 1588v2 standard. To be
specific, the master equipment encapsulates the local system clock into a Sync packet as a
timestamp and transmits the Sync packet to a packet switched network (PSN), which forwards
the Sync packet to the slave equipment. On receiving the Sync packet, the slave equipment
extracts the timestamp from the Sync packet and recovers the clock frequency by using the ACR
algorithm. In this way, the clock frequency of the PTP equipment at the two ends of a PSN is
synchronized.
IEEE 1588 ACR achieves only frequency synchronization but not time synchronization.
Purpose
With the IEEE 1588 ACR technology applied on a transport network, the clock frequency is
carried in an IEEE 1588v2 packet, which traverses an asynchronous PSN. As a result, the clock
frequency of the equipment at the two ends of the PSN is synchronized.
In the network as shown in Figure 4-48, the PTP node on the RNC side encapsulates the clock
frequency of the building integrated timing supply (BITS) equipment into an IEEE 1588v2
System
72
packet, which traverses the asynchronous PSN. On receiving the IEEE 1588v2 packet, the PTP
nodes on the NodeB side recover the clock frequency of the BITS equipment from the IEEE
1588v2 packet by using the ACR algorithm, and send the clock frequency to the NodeBs. In this
way, the clock frequencies of the NodeBs are synchronized with the clock frequency of the RNC.
Figure 4-48 IEEE 1588 ACR frequency synchronization
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB
RNC
BITS
PTP node
Transparent
transmission of
frequency
Frequency
synchronization
Router/Switch
PSN
Equipment on a transport network supports the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals
from a non-transport network into synchronous Ethernet clock signals to achieve networkwide
frequency synchronization.
As shown in Figure 4-49, BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit clock signals to Router1 and
Router 2 through external clock ports. Because Router1 and Router2 need to transmit the clock
signals to convergence-layer NEs (NE1 and NE2) through a non-transport network, they convert
the clock signals into IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals. After the IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals
traverse the non-transport network and reach NE1 and NE2, the two NEs restore the signals into
synchronous Ethernet clock signals and transmit them to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals
to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner,
networkwide frequency synchronization is achieved.
NOTE
Currently, the equipment supports only the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals into synchronous
Ethernet signals.
System
73
Figure 4-49 Typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR
Access
layer
Converge
nce layer
OptiX OSN access
equipment
equipment
Clock information
Clock
information
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Node B
Node B
Node B
BITS1 BITS2
NE1 NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6 NE7
IEEE 1588 ACR
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Synchronous
ethernet clock
Clock
information
Router1 Router2

System
74
CES ACR
This section defines CES ACR and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
CES ACR uses the adaptive clock recovery (ACR) technology to recover clock synchronization
information carried by CES packets. CES ACR is available in two types: standard and enhanced.
In a standard CES ACR solution, the source end (Master) uses the local clock information as
the timestamp in a Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packet header and encapsulates the local
clock information in a CES packet. The sink end (Slave) recovers the clock using the timestamp
in the packet. This method prevents signal impairment during the transmission.
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the enhanced timestamp clock solution. That is, clocks can
be recovered based on SN in CES packets rather than timestamps in RTP packet headers. See
Figure 4-50.
Figure 4-50 CES ACR clock solution
PSN
PE1
PE2 BTS
BSC
CES
Primary
reference
clock
E1
E1 CES
Master
SN
Processing Processing
SN
CES E1
Slave
E1
SN: Sequnce Number

Purpose
In the packet domain, CES ACR is mainly used to transparently transmit E1 clocks in the PSN.
System
75
5 Hardware and Structure
About This Chapter
This section describes the chassis, boards, and external components of the equipment.
5.1 Chassis
This section describes the structure, slot layout, and access capacity of the chassis.
5.2 Outdoor Cabinet
The equipment operating in a high-temperature and dust-concentrated outdoor environment
needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
5.3 Board Category
This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. Different boards provide the
equipment with different functions.
System
Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
76
5.1 Chassis
This section describes the structure, slot layout, and access capacity of the chassis.
5.1.1 Chassis Structure
This section describes the chassis structure and equipment labels.
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
Board
installation
area

SLOT
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
SLOT
10
(PIU)
SLOT
11
(FAN) SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
SLOT 1 (EXT)
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT)
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
Power supply boards
System control, switching,
and timing boards
Extended boards
Fan board
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
W
H
D
NOTE
An OptiX OSN 550 NE can automatically save its NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask to its
backplane. After a new system control, switching, and timing board replaces an original one, the NE
automatically uses the saved information. Therefore, you do not need to set the NE ID, extended ID, IP
address, and subnet mask for the substitute board.
System
77
Ventilation Design
The chassis is densely covered with small air holes. Through these holes, air is let in from the
left and out from the right by fans.
NOTE
Ensure the smooth flow of air inside and around the equipment. Do not block the air intake vents and air
exhaust vents of subracks when cabling. Keep the top of subracks clean.
Figure 5-1 Ventilation design of the OptiX OSN 550
AIR IN
AIR OUT

Label Description
Table 5-1 provides the description of the labels on the chassis and boards. Actual labels may
vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 5-1 Description of labels
Label Label Name Description
ESD protection label Indicates that the
equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the
grounding position
of the chassis.
Fan warning label Warns you not to
touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
System
78
Power caution label Instructs you to
read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

Laser safety class
label
The laser safety
class label CLASS
1 indicates that the
maximum optical
power of the
optical port is less
than 10 dBm (10
mW).
/ QUALIFICATION CARD

MADE IN CHINA HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
Qualification card
label
Indicates that the
equipment has
been quality
checked.
RoHS label Indicates that the
equipment
contains certain
hazardous
substances
specified in the
RoHS directive.
The equipment
needs to be
recycled after the
environment-
friendly use period
of 50 years expires.
System
79
l DC power
l AC power
Product nameplate
label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.

5.1.2 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (Packet)
This section provides switching capacities and slot access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in
packet mode.
Switching Capacities
Table 5-2 lists packet switching capacities when different system control, switching, and timing
boards are installed.
Table 5-2 Switching capacities of the OptiX OSN 550
Board Maximum Switching Capacity (Gbit/s)
PCXLX 60
PCXX 60
PCXLG 40
PCXGA 20
PCXGB 40

Access Capacities of Slots
Figure 5-2 provides access capacities of slots when PCXLX/PCXX boards are installed on the
OptiX OSN 550.
System
80
Figure 5-2 Access capacities of slots when PCXLX/PCXX boards are installed on the OptiX
OSN 550
SLO
T
9
(PIU
)
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
SLO
T
1
0
(PIU
)
SLO
T
1
1
(FAN)
SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
10Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1 10Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s

Figure 5-3 provides access capacities of slots when PCXGB/PCXLG boards are installed on
the OptiX OSN 550.
Figure 5-3 Access capacities of slots when PCXLG/PCXGB boards are installed on the OptiX
OSN 550
SLO
T
9
(PIU
)
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
SLO
T
1
0
(PIU
)
SLO
T
1
1
(FAN)
SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
10Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1 10Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
1Gbit/s 1Gbit/s

Figure 5-4 provides access capacities of slots when PCXGA boards are installed on the OptiX
OSN 550.
Figure 5-4 Access capacities of slots when PCXGA boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550
SLO
T
9
(PIU
)
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
SLO
T
1
0
(PIU
)
SLO
T
1
1
(FAN)
SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
2.5Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1 2.5Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
1Gbit/s 1Gbit/s

5.1.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (TDM)
This section provides cross-connect capacities and slot access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550
in TDM mode.
System
81
Cross-Connect Capacities
Table 5-3 lists cross-connect capacities when different system control, switching, and timing
boards are installed.
Table 5-3 Cross-connect capacities of the OptiX OSN 550
Board Higher Order Cross-
Connect Capacity (Gbit/
s)
Lower Order Cross-
Connect Capacity (Gbit/
s)
PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB/CXL
20 5

Access Capacities of Slots
Access capacities of all slots are shown in Figure 5-5. The access capacity of a slot remains the
same regardless of whether the CXL, PCXLX, PCXX, PCXLG, PCXGA, or PCXGB board is
installed.
Figure 5-5 Access capacities of slots on the OptiX OSN 550
SLO
T
9
(PIU
)
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)
SLO
T
1
0
(PIU
)
SLO
T
1
1
(FAN)
SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
2.5Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s

NOTE
l The maximum access capacity of any of slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 is 2.5 Gbit/s but the boards in the four slots
cannot all provide an upstream bandwidth of 2.5 Gbit/s at the same time.
l If both boards in slots 1 and 2 provide an upstream bandwidth of 2.5 Gbit/s, slots 3 and 4 cannot house
any TDM service boards.
l If both boards in slots 3 and 4 provide an upstream bandwidth of 2.5 Gbit/s, slots 1 and 2 cannot house
any TDM service boards.
5.2 Outdoor Cabinet
The equipment operating in a high-temperature and dust-concentrated outdoor environment
needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
System
82
The OptiX OSN 550 can be installed in APM30H outdoor cabinet, For the details of APM30H,
see Outdoor Cabinet in Hardware Description.
5.3 Board Category
This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. Different boards provide the
equipment with different functions.
Table 5-4 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
System
83
Table 5-4 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
(Hybrid)
TNM1
PCXL
X
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 60
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One
10GE and
one STM-
N ports
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial
port (sharing one RJ45 port)
l One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) optical port. The optical
port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,
S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
l One 10GE XFP optical port:
10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and
8
System
84
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXX
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 60
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One
10GE
port
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One 10GE XFP optical port:
10GBASE-SR (LAN),
10GBASE-SW (WAN),
10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN),
10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and
8
System
85
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXL
G
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 40
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One GE
and one
STM-N
ports
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) optical port. The optical
port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,
S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2.
l One GE SFP optical port:
1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Slots 7 and
8
System
86
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXG
A
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One GE
port
l System
communi
cation
and
control
Slots 7 and
8
System
87
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
PCXG
B
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A packet
switching
capacity
of 40
Gbit/s
l A higher
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l One GE
port
l System
communi
cation
and
control
Slots 7 and
8
System
control,
switching,
and timing
board
(TDM)
TNM1
CXL1
The cross-
connect,
timing,
system
control, and
line board
supports:
l A higher
order
cross-
l One STM-1 SFP optical port. The
optical port type can be S-1.1,
L-1.1, or L-1.2.
Slots 7 and
8
TNM1
CXL4
l One STM-4 SFP optical port of
the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 7 and
8
System
88
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
CXL16
connect
capacity
of 20
Gbit/s
and a
lower
order
cross-
connect
capacity
of 5 Gbit/
s
l System
communi
cation
and
control
l One STM-16 SFP optical port of
the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2 type
Slots 7 and
8
Packet
processing
board
TNM1
MD1
32xsmart E1
service
processing
board
75/120-ohm E1 port Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EM6T
6xRJ45 FE/
GE
processing
board
l Four FE electrical ports:
10/100BASE-T(X)
l Two GE electrical ports (they can
serve as FE electrical ports):
1000BASE-T
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EM6F
4xRJ45 and
2xSFP FE/
GE
processing
board
l Four FE electrical ports:
10/100BASE-T(X)
l Two GE/FE SFP optical/
electrical ports: 1000BASE-SX/
1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/
1000BASE-ZX/1000BASE-T/
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/
100BASE-ZX
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EG4C
4xGE (SFP/
RJ45)
processing
board
l Four GE electrical ports:
1000BASE-T
l Four GE/FE SFP optical ports:
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/
100BASE-ZX
Slots 3 to 6
System
89
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
EF8F
8xFE
processing
board
l Eight FE SFP optical/electrical
ports: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-
FX/100BASE-LX/100BASE-
VX/100BASE-ZX/100BASE-T
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
EX1
1x10GE
processing
board
One 10GE XFP optical port:
10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-
SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-
ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN),
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 1 and
2 (An EX1
board
cannot
work with
a PCXGA
board.)
TNM1
CQ1
4-port
channelized
STM-1
service
processing
board
l Four STM-1 SFP optical/
electrical ports of the S-1.1,
L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical type or of
SFP electrical modules
Slots 1 to 6
SDH board TNH2S
L1D
2xSTM-1
interface
board
Two STM-1 SFP optical ports. The
optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
or L-1.2.
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S
L1Q
4xSTM-1
interface
board
Four STM-1 SFP optical ports. The
optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1,
or L-1.2.
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S
L4D
2xSTM-4
interface
board
Two STM-4 SFP optical ports of the
S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 1 to 6
PDH board TNH2S
P3D
42xE1/T1
tributary
board
Forty-two 75/120-ohm E1 ports or
forty-two 100-ohm T1 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2P
L3T
3xE3/T3
tributary
board
Three 75-ohm E3/T3 ports Slots 1 to 6
EoS board TNH2E
FS8
8xFE
switching
and
processing
board
Eight FE electrical ports:
10/100BASE-T(X)
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2E
GT1
1xGE
transparent
transmission
board
One GE SFP optical/electrical port:
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/
1000BASE-T
Slots 1 to 6
System
90
Board
Classificat
ion
Board
Acron
ym
Board
Name
Port Type Valid
Slot
TNM1
EGS4
4xGE
switching
and
processing
board
Four GE/FE SFP optical/electrical
ports: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-
LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-
ZX/1000BASE-T/100BASE-BX/
100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/
Slots 1 to 6
WDM board TNM1
DMD2
2-port optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board
l wIN/wOUT
l wA1/wA2
l wD1/wD2
l eIN/eOUT
l eA1/eA2
l eD1/eD2
slot 1 to 6
Auxiliary
board
TNM1
AUX
Auxiliary
interface
board
l One orderwire phone port
l One asynchronous data port
l One synchronous data port
l 6-input/2-output alarm port
l One 2-channel external clock
port
l Two 2-channel external time
ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
FAN
Fan board N/A Slot 93
Power
supply
board
UPM Uninterrupti
ble power
module
l One 110 V/220 V AC power
input port
l Two -48 V DC power output
ports
Slot 97
TND1P
IU
Power
supply board
One -48 V/-60 V DC power input
port
Slots 91
and 92
TNF1A
PIU
Power
supply board
Two 110 V/220 V AC power input
ports
l Slots 4
and 6
(recom
mended
)
l Slots 2
and 4
System
91
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 supports various service networking topologies in the time division
multiplexing (TDM) and packet domains, applicable to a wide range of scenarios.
6.1 Basic Network Topologies
OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring
with chain.
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking
In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 can transport packet services and time division
multiplexing (TDM) services at the same time.
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking
This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking.
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking
This section describes the typical application of time division multiplexing (TDM) networking.
System
Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
92
6.1 Basic Network Topologies
OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring
with chain.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports separate and combined configurations of the following types:
terminal multiplexer (TM), add/drop multiplexer (ADM), and multiple add/drop multiplexer
(MADM).
OptiX OSN 550s can support a wide range of network topologies. In addition, OptiX OSN
550s can be interconnected with other OptiX OSN equipment, OptiX DWDM equipment, and
OptiX Metro equipment to provide a complete transport network solution. See Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Network topologies supported by OptiX OSN 550s and corresponding legends
Network Topology Legend
Chain
Ring
Tangent rings
Intersecting rings
System
93
Network Topology Legend
Ring with chain

6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking
In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 can transport packet services and time division
multiplexing (TDM) services at the same time.
Figure 6-1 shows a Hybrid ring network, on which the following base station services are
transmitted:
l 2G base station services
l 3G ATM base station services
l 3G IP base station services
Figure 6-1 Hybrid networking
OptiX OSN 550
BTS NodeB BSC RNC
OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II
E1/T1
ATM/IMA
E1
FE
E1/STM-1
ATM/IMA
E1/GE
Packet ring
TDM ring
Signal flow

Networking Solution
When numerous E1 services and Ethernet services coexist, the Hybrid networking solution
mixing the SDH technology and PTN technology is used to meet multi-service transmission
demands and improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.
l E1 services are transmitted in pure TDM mode over the SDH network, which reduces the
network buildout and maintenance expenditure.
System
94
l FE services and GE services are transmitted in pure packet mode over the PTN network,
which reduces the transmission expenditure per bit.
l WDM colored optical ports and built-in optical add/drop multiplexers are used when optical
fiber resources are over-consumed or inadequate.
Service Types
l 2G base station services and 3G ATM base station services are transmitted to the OptiX
OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 (or PWE3) mode respectively. These
services are then mapped to VC-12s and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end
mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II that is
connected to the BSC.
l 3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode, and
encapsulated into PWE3 packets. The PWE3 packets are then aggregated to the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II that is connected to the RNC in end-to-end mode.
Table 6-2 lists the service types and their transmission modes.
Table 6-2 Service types and their transmission modes for a Hybrid network
UNI-side
Device
Service Port Encapsulation
Mode
Transmission
Technology
Service
Topology
2G base station TDM E1/T1 VC SDH VC P2P
connection
3G ATM base
station
ATM/IMA E1 VC SDH VC P2P
connection
3G IP base
station
FE PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-
TP
VPWS, VPLS

NOTE
l A 3G base station and an RNC exchange services, base station management information, and signaling.
Base station management information and signaling due to their importance are preferentially
processed in the transmission network. Therefore, base station management information and signaling
are assigned a VLAN called the management VLAN, and services are assigned a VLAN called the
service VLAN. The management VLAN has a higher priority than the service VLAN.
l To prevent VLAN conflicts, VLANs must be planned by considering all base stations. Generally, the
base stations managed by the same RNC are grouped into multiple switch areas. All base stations in
the same switch area share one management VLAN and one service VLAN. Base stations in different
switch areas have different management VLANs and service VLANs. See Figure 6-2.
l On the same OptiX OSN 550, the management VLAN and service VLAN are mapped to different
PWs, and the PWs are carried by the same tunnel to save label resources.
System
95
Figure 6-2 VLAN plan
Switch area 1:
Management VLAN=68, Pri=6
Service VLAN=78, Pri=4
Switch area 2:
Switch area 3:
RNC
Transmission network
NodeB NodeB NodeB

Protection
l The SDH network is protected by the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) or MSP
mechanism.
l The PTN network is protected by the PW 1:1 APS or tunnel 1:1 APS mechanism. To achieve
dual-homing at the convergence layer, a 1:1 APS protection group with the same source
but different sinks needs to be configured, as shown in Figure 6-3.
System
96
Figure 6-3 PW/Tunnel 1:1 APS
P
ro
te
c
tio
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
W
o
rk
in
g
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
PW
Tunnel
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 PW APS
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 tunnel APS

OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions for PTN networks, including ETH
OAM, MPLS OAM, and MPLS-TP OAM. Figure 6-4 shows the application of hierarchical
OAM.
System
97
Figure 6-4 Application of hierarchical OAM on a Hybrid network
CE1
CE2
PE1
CE4
CE3
P
P
P
P
P
PE2
Ethernet Port OAM
Ethernet Port OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM
ETH Layer
PW Layer
Tunnel Layer
MEP
MEP
MEP MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP MIP

NOTE
For higher network bandwidth utilization, generally only CC/CV OAM is enabled for a tunnel. In addition,
to limit tunnel APS protection switching within 50 ms, the detection packet transmission interval is set to
3.3 ms.
QoS
As the service access node, an OptiX OSN 550 is generally connected to multiple base stations.
Each base station has different priorities of management data and service data. The quality of
service (QoS) function is used for managing traffic of different services from different base
stations. Table 6-3 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 6-3 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a Hybrid network
Network
Position
Point of Application QoS Function
Ingress node Ingress direction of the
UNI port
VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and
committed access rate (CAR)
PW ingress CAR for PWs, the VLAN Pri field being mapped
to the LSP EXP field
Egress direction of the
NNI port
Weighted random early detection (WRED)
congestion management, SP+WRR scheduling
(SP is short for strict priority and weighted round
robin for WRR.)
Transit node Ingress direction of the
NNI port
Services being transmitted to different priority
queues based on their LSP EXP fields
System
98
Network
Position
NNI port
WRED congestion management, SP+WRR or SP
+WFQ scheduling (WFQ is short for weighted
fair queuing.)
Egress node Ingress direction of the
NNI port
UNI port
WRED, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling, the
LSP EXP field being mapped to the VLAN Pri
field
Ingress direction of the
UNI port
CAR

Synchronization
The SDH clock or synchronous Ethernet clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
l As shown in Figure 6-5, clock synchronization information from the two building
integrated timing supplies (BITSs) is injected into the two OptiX OSN 580/7500 II nodes
on the aggregation ring. The master BITS provides a higher-priority clock source and the
slave BITS provides a lower-priority clock source.
l The base stations derive clock synchronization information from the OptiX OSN 550 by
means of the retiming E1 clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization on a Hybrid network
BITS
Node B
Slave
BITS
Physical synchronization route
Physical synchronization protection route
OptiX OSN 550
BTS
OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II
ATM/IMA
E1/FE/2M
external clock
Master
BITS
TDM E1

System
99
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking
This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking.
Figure 6-6 shows a pure packet network, on which the following base station services are
transmitted:
l LTE base station services
Figure 6-6 Pure packet networking
OptiX OSN 550/
500
BTS NodeB BSC RNC
OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II
E1/T1
ATM/IMA
E1
FE
E1/STM-1
ATM/IMA
E1/GE
Packet ring
Signal flow
10GE
S-GW/MME
Aggregation
switch
Router

Networking Solution
When numerous Ethernet services and a few E1 services coexist, the pure packet networking
solution using the expenditure-effective PTN technology is used to meet multi-service
transmission demands and improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and
maintenance.
l FE services and GE services are transmitted in pure packet mode over the PTN network,
which reduces the transmission expenditure per bit.
l E1 services are transmitted in TDM/ATM PWE3 mode over the PTN network since the
TDM network is unavailable in the pure packet networking solution.
Service Types
l 3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode, and
3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode.
System
100
l LTE base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in GE mode, and
3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode.
OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 mode respectively. These services are
then encapsulated into PWE3 packets. Finally, the PWE3 packets are aggregated to the
OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode.
Table 6-4 Service types and their transmission modes for a pure PTN network
UNI-side
Device
Mode
Transmission
Technology
Service
Topology
3G IP base
station
FE PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-
TP
VPWS, VPLS
LTE base
station
GE PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-
TP
VPWS, VPLS
2G base station TDM E1/T1 PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-
TP
End-to-end P2P
connection
3G ATM base
station
ATM/IMA E1 PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-
TP
End-to-end P2P
connection

NOTE
l A 3G/LTE base station and an RNC/S-GW/MME exchange services, base station management
information, and signaling. Base station management information and signaling due to their importance
are preferentially processed in the transmission network. Therefore, base station management
information and signaling are assigned a VLAN called the management VLAN, and services are
assigned a VLAN called the service VLAN. The management VLAN has a higher priority than the
service VLAN.
l To prevent VLAN conflicts, VLANs must be planned by considering all base stations. Generally, the
base stations managed by the same RNC/S-GW/MME are grouped into multiple switch areas. All base
stations in the same switch area share one management VLAN and one service VLAN. Base stations
in different switch areas have different management VLANs and service VLANs. See Figure 6-7.
l On the same OptiX OSN 550, the management VLAN and service VLAN are mapped to different
PWs, and the PWs are carried by the same tunnel to save label resources.
System
101
Figure 6-7 VLAN plan
Switch area 1:
Switch area 2:
Switch area 3:
NodeB/eNodeB NodeB/eNodeB NodeB/eNodeB
RNC/S-GW/MME
Transmission network

Protection
The PTN network is protected by the PW 1:1 APS or tunnel 1:1 APS mechanism. To achieve
dual-homing at the convergence layer, a 1:1 APS protection group with the same source but
different sinks needs to be configured, as shown in Figure 6-8.
System
102
Figure 6-8 PW/Tunnel 1:1 APS
P
ro
te
c
tio
n
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
W
o
rk
in
g
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
PW
Tunnel
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 PW APS
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 tunnel APS

OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions for PTN networks, including ETH
OAM, MPLS OAM, and MPLS-TP OAM. Figure 6-9 shows the application of hierarchical
OAM.
System
103
Figure 6-9 Application of hierarchical OAM on a Hybrid network
CE1
CE2
PE1
CE4
CE3
P
P
P
P
P
PE2
Ethernet Port OAM
Ethernet Port OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM
ETH Layer
PW Layer
Tunnel Layer
MEP
MEP
MEP MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP MIP

NOTE
For higher network bandwidth utilization, generally only CC/CV OAM is enabled for a tunnel. In addition,
to limit tunnel APS protection switching within 50 ms, the detection packet transmission interval is set to
3.3 ms.
QoS
As the service access node, an OptiX OSN 550 is generally connected to multiple base stations.
Each base station has different priorities of management data and service data. The QoS function
is used for managing traffic of different services from different base stations. Table 6-5 lists the
QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 6-5 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a pure PTN network
Network
Position
Ingress node Ingress direction of the
UNI port
committed access rate (CAR)
PW ingress CAR for PWs, the VLAN Pri field being mapped
to the LSP EXP field
NNI port
Weighted random early detection (WRED)
congestion management, SP+WRR scheduling
(SP is short for strict priority and weighted round
robin for WRR.)
Transit node Ingress direction of the
NNI port
System
104
Network
Position
NNI port
WRED congestion management, SP+WRR or SP
+WFQ scheduling (WFQ is short for weighted
fair queuing.)
Egress node Ingress direction of the
NNI port
UNI port
WRED, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling, the
LSP EXP field being mapped to the VLAN Pri
field
Ingress direction of the
UNI port
CAR

Synchronization
The synchronous Ethernet clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
means of the retiming E1 clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-10 Clock synchronization on a pure PTN network
BITS
Node B
Slave
BITS
OptiX OSN 550
BTS
OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II
ATM/IMA
E1/FE/2M
external clock
Master
BITS
TDM E1

System
105
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking
This section describes the typical application of time division multiplexing (TDM) networking.
Figure 6-11 shows a TDM network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
Figure 6-11 Pure TDM networking
OptiX OSN 550
BTS NodeB BSC RNC
OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II
E1/T1
FE
E1/STM-1
GE
TDM ring
Signal flow

Networking Solution
When numerous E1 services and a few Ethernet services coexist, the pure TDM networking
solution using the sophisticated and expenditure-effective SDH technology is used to improve
the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.
l E1 services are transmitted in pure TDM mode over the SDH network, which reduces the
network buildout and maintenance expenditure.
l FE services are transmitted in Ethernet over SDH (EoS) mode over the SDH network since
the PTN network is unavailable in the pure TDM networking solution.
Service Types
OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 mode respectively. These services are
then mapped to VC-12s and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end mode. Finally,
these services are aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II that is connected to the BSC.
l 3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode. These
services are then encapsulated into VC-12s in EoS mode and transmitted over the SDH
network in end-to-end mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II that is connected to the RNC.
System
106
Table 6-6 Service types and their transmission modes for a pure TDM network
UNI-side
Device
Mode
Transmission
Technology
Service
Topology
2G base station TDM E1/T1 VC SDH VC P2P
connection
3G ATM base
station
ATM/IMA E1 VC SDH VC P2P
connection
3G IP base
station
FE Ethernet over
SDH
SDH EVPL,
EVPLAN

Protection
The SDH network is protected by the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) or MSP
mechanism.
OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet port OAM that complies with IEEE 802.3ah and Ethernet
service OAM that complies with IEEE 802.1ag for Ethernet service fault analysis and locating.
Figure 6-12 shows the application of ETH OAM.
Figure 6-12 Application of ETH OAM on a pure TDM network
Ethernet Port OAM
Ethernet Port OAM
ETH Layer
MEP MEP
NodeB RNC
FE
FE
GE

QoS
As the service access node, the OptiX OSN 550 may receive burst Ethernet traffic. The
committed access rate (CAR) mechanism must be applied for incoming traffic. Incoming traffic
System
107
must be scheduled before being transmitted to virtual concatenation (VC) channels, to ensure
that higher-priority services are forwarded first. The QoS function is used for managing traffic
of different services from different base stations. Table 6-7 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX
OSN 550.
Table 6-7 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a pure TDM network
Network
Position
Access node Ingress direction of the
UNI port
Traffic classification, committed access rate
(CAR), priority-based scheduling
Aggregation node Ingress direction of the
UNI port
Traffic classification, CAR, priority-based
scheduling

Synchronization
The SDH clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
means of the retiming E1 clock or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-13 Clock synchronization on a pure TDM network
BITS Node B
Slave
BITS
OptiX OSN 550 BTS
OptiX OSN
3500/7500 II
ATM/IMA
E1/2M external
clock
Master
BITS
TDM E1
System
108
7 Network Management System
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 is uniformly managed by the transmission network management system
(NMS) and local craft terminal (LCT) through the ETH port. The OptiX OSN 550 supports the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
The NMS maintains the OSN, SDH, Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on an entire
network. The NMS can implement end-to-end configurations for packet and TDM services.
The OptiX OSN 550 complies with ITU-T Recommendations. The equipment adopts a
management information model and an object-oriented management technology. With the NMS,
the equipment can exchange information with the NE software through the communication
module to manage alarms and performance events in a centralized manner. In addition, end-to-
end configuration on the management plane can be achieved.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports SNMPv2/SNMPv3, which allows a third-party NMS to monitor
equipment performance.
7.1 Network Management
This chapter describes the network management system, inter-NE communication management,
and intra-NE communication management.
7.2 DCN Management
Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission
of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN)
is a network management data communication channel, with which users can remotely manage
and maintain NEs.
7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the
U2000 server time. In this way, the U2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms
occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.
System
Product Description 7 Network Management System
109
7.1 Network Management
This chapter describes the network management system, inter-NE communication management,
and intra-NE communication management.
Figure 7-1 shows the typical network management application of the OptiX OSN 550.
l Network management system: U2000 and U2000 LCT
l Inter-NE communication management:
The NEs at sites A and C are gateway NEs (GNEs) and are connected to the external
DCN through a switch or router. All the other NEs are non-GNEs that communicate
with the NMS through GNEs.
The NEs between sites A and D are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP
over DCC protocol to exchange information over ESC/OSC channels.
The NEs between sites E and C are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP
over DCC protocol to exchange information over ESC channels.
The NEs between sites F and C are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP
over DCC protocol to exchange information over inband channels.
Some NEs between sites A and F (NEs connected to an optical or electrical transmission
device, such as NEs at site B) are connected with network cables, and use the HWECC
or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over Ethernet channels (at NM_ETH
ports).
l Intra-NE communication management: The master and slave subracks implement intra-NE
communication for each NE at sites A-D. One NE at site A has three subracks (one master
is connected to two slaves).
System
110
Figure 7-1 Network management
External DCN
Secondary
U2000
Fiber
Network cable
NON-GNE
Switch
Router
Site B
U2000
Web LCT
Primary
U2000
GNE
Subrack
Master
Slave Slave
Site D
Site C
Site A
Site F
Site E
NON-GNE
GNE
NON-GNE
NON-GNE
OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 1800

NOTE
Figure 7-1 illustrates a network that has Huawei equipment deployed at different layers: NEs at sites A-
D are OptiX OSN 8800 NEs, NEs at site E are OptiX OSN 1800 NEs, and NEs at site F are OptiX OSN
550/500 NEs.
Network management involves the following aspects:
Network Management System
The network management system (NMS) provides unified management for OptiX equipment.
In compliance with associated ITU-T Recommendations, the NMS uses a standard information
management model and object-oriented management technology.
The NMS manages alarms, performance, configurations, communication, security, and
topologies of the entire optical transmission system. The NMS also gives users end-to-end
management capabilities. An NMS helps to improve network quality, lower maintenance
expenditures, and ensure efficient utilization of network resources.
The NMS includes two sets of network management software: iManager U2000 (U2000) and
iManager U2000 LCT (U2000 LCT). The U2000 is usually installed at a network management
center, and most equipment is managed remotely. The LCT provides the ability to configure and
maintain individual NEs. The LCT is usually installed on a PC for local access to equipment.
Inter-NE Communication Management
Inter-NE communication management is implemented based on data communication networks
(DCNs). A DCN consists of NMSs, GNEs, non-GNEs, and the connections between them. Both
System
111
NMSs and NEs are nodes of a DCN. The DCN between the NMSs and NEs is called the external
DCN, and the DCN between NEs is called the internal DCN.
l An external DCN is a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN) and uses
the TCP/IP protocol for communication. It provides communication between NMSs and
between the NMS server and GNEs.
l An internal DCN uses the HWECC or TCP/IP protocol to provide communication between
NEs. NEs support inband DCN and outband DCN. The outband DCN uses DCC overhead
bytes as physical DCN channels. The inband DCN uses Ethernet service channels as
physical DCN channels.
7.2 DCN Management
Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission
of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN)
is a network management data communication channel, with which users can remotely manage
and maintain NEs.
Table 7-1 lists the DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 7-1 DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Item Inband DCN Outband DCN
Purpose and
benefit
NM information is transmitted
through the service channels
provided by managed equipment.
Therefore, no extra equipment or
DCN is required. This reduces
operating expenditure.
NM information is transmitted on
non-service channels.
Feature l Flexible networking: NM
information is encapsulated into
Ethernet frames and carries a
fixed VLAN ID to get separated
from the service data. The NM
information is transmitted with
services on service channels.
l Configurable VLAN priorities
for inband DCN packets
High reliability: Outband DCN uses
dedicated maintenance channels.
Therefore, an NMC can construct a
DCN network with managed
equipment in various ways, such as
E1 private lines and Ethernet; in
addition, you can obtain NM
information in time even when
faults occur on service channels.
Networking
technology
l HWECC
l IP
l HWECC
l IP
l OSI
Application
scenario
Packet network TDM network
Resource
allocation
mode
N/A Channel types: D1-D3
System
112
Item Inband DCN Outband DCN
Running mode:
l Mode 1: 32 channels using D1-
D3 bytes
l Mode 2: 12 channels using D1-
D3 bytes or 6 channels using D4-
D12 bytes

7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the
U2000 server time. In this way, the U2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms
occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000, the time at which such alarms and
events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regard
to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the U2000. This may cause trouble in fault location.
In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the
NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the U2000 provides three time
synchronization schemes: synchronizing with the U2000 server, synchronizing with the NTP
server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server and synchronizing with the standard
NTP server.
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000 server
time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000 server time
manually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time of the
workstation or computer where the U2000 server is located. This scheme features easy
operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time.
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the NTP server or synchronizing with the
standard NTP server, the NE time and the U2000 time are synchronized with the NTP server
time or the standard NTP server time automatically. The NTP server can be the U2000
server or a special time server. This scheme enables the U2000 and NEs to have a time
accuracy of one nanosecond in theory, and applies to a network with high requirement for
time accuracy.
NTP Network Application
Figure 7-2 shows a network in which NTP is used to ensure synchronization across the network.
System
113
Figure 7-2 Network using NTP to ensure synchronization
Time server
NMS server
NE1
NE5 NE4
NE3
NE2
The highest-level time
server
Clients
The middle-level time
server

As shown in Figure 7-2, the equipment in the network can be classified into three categories:
l The highest-level time server: the 0-level time server
l The middle-level time server: the 1- or 2-level time server that obtains time information
from the higher-level time server and provides time information for the lower-level time
server
l Clients: obtaining time information only
In application, the server and clients can be configured as follows:
l Choose the NMS server as the time server for NEs. The NMS server can be set as the
highest-level time server, or set to obtain time information from other time servers.
l NEs can only be set as the client, obtaining time information from the specified time server.
System
114
8 Operation and Maintenance
About This Chapter
Routine equipment maintenance and troubleshooting are essential to ensure that a network runs
properly. The OptiX OSN 550 provides strong maintenance capabilities.
Table 8-1 Functions for deployment and configuration
Function Description
Automatic search for
optical fibers
Supports the fiber auto-discovery function on the NMS.

System
Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
115
Table 8-2 Routine maintenance functions
Alarm and
performance
management
l Provides audible and visual alarms warn of emergencies to help
network administrators take prompt action.
l Provides running status indicators and alarm indicators on all
boards to help administrators locate and handle faults quickly.
l Provides the alarm input and output function to facilitate alarm
collection for external devices.
l Dynamically monitors the operation and alarm status of all NEs
using the NMS.
l Detects alarms and performance of a standby system control
board.
l Stores results of sixteen consecutive 15-minute performance
monitoring events, that is, four hours of performance events
divided into 15-minute segments.
l Stores results of six consecutive 24-hour performance monitoring
events, that is, six days of performance events divided into 24-
hour segments.
RMON Monitors data from different network segments on a transmission
network. RMON supplements simple Ethernet performance
management tools, and can be used on a wide range of networks.
Voltage check Measures input voltages and detects undervoltage and overvoltage
states.
Automatic laser
shutdown (ALS)
l SDH single-mode optical ports support the ALS function.
l Packet Ethernet boards support the setting of upper threshold or
lower threshold of input optical power.
Port impedance query Supports the query of port impedance on the NMS.
Optical module
information query
Allows the NMS to query information about optical modules,
including single-mode/multi-mode, rate level, supplier, production
date, and wavelength.
Outdoor cabinet
monitoring
Monitors outdoor cabinets by means of the monitoring ports on AUX
boards.
Power consumption
control
l Computes system power consumption.
l Monitors the total power consumption of an NE, and reports an
alarm if the total power consumption exceeds the power
consumption threshold of the NE.
l Supports the query of the power consumption of an NE/board by
using the NMS.
Storage of the ID and
IP address of an NE
The backplane stores IDs and IP addresses of NEs, and the active
SCC board reads these from the backplane.
System
116
Port information
query
Queries communication protocols in use, status, functions, and
names of ports used for external communication and physical ports
connected to networks.

Table 8-3 Fault diagnosis functions
ETH OAM Uses outband packets to detect and monitor the connectivity and
performance of service trails. The process does not affect services.
ATM OAM Detects and locates ATM faults, and monitors ATM performance.
MPLS OAM l Detects and locates faults on an MPLS network, and works with
MPLS APS to protect services.
l MPLS OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW OAM.
Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates
at the PW layer.
MPLS-TP OAM l MPLS-TP OAM can detect, identify, and locate faults on packet
switched networks, and notify NEs of the faults, so the NEs can
implement protection switching.
l MPLS-TP OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW
OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM
operates at the PW layer.
One-click data
collection
l Provides a one-click data collection function for fault data to
reduce data collection time before service recovery.
l Users can collect fault data selectively and can stop a collection
process manually.
Loopback Service boards support inloops and outloops on ports to facilitate
fault location.
Remote maintenance Maintenance personnel can use a public telephone network to
remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 550 equipment.
PRBS l An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used as an
instrument to transmit and receive unframed services in order to
analyze whether service paths are faulty.
l An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used to analyze
itself or the entire network.
l The PRBS function substitutes for a test instrument during
deployment or fault location.
Warm/Cold resets System control, switching, and timing boards and service boards
support warm and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect services.
System
117
Hot swap l Service boards, system control, switching, and timing boards,
power supply boards, and fan boards support hot swapping.
l Pluggable optical modules can be hot-swapped.
l Service cables and auxiliary cables can be hot-swapped.
Port mirroring Supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service testing and
service fault diagnosis without affecting the services.
Disaster recovery for
NE configuration data
Restores NE data using a configuration file downloaded from the
NMS. A traditional NE database backup may end up with a failure.
Disaster recovery for NE configuration data uses NMS configuration
data as the data restoration source to rebuild NE configuration
database. This function applies to the following scenarios:
l An NE is down and its database needs to be rebuilt.
l A few services carried by an NE are interrupted. The NE cannot
be configured and there is no valid database backup file.
l Many services carried by an NE are interrupted. The NE cannot
be configured, or can be configured but the configuration process
is too long. Furthermore, there is no valid database backup file.
NOTICE
Downloading configuration data from the NMS is highly risky and this
operation must be performed under the on-site guidance of a Huawei engineer.
After an NE database on a live network is damaged, conventional maintenance
methods are preferred, such as manual recovery and database restoration using
a DC tool.
Alarm reporting upon
removal of important
peripheral storage
devices
When a CF storage card is removed, the equipment reports a security
alarm.
NSF NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. When the
control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures
that the data services are not interrupted, ensuring transmission of
the key services on the network.

Table 8-4 Functions for upgrades
Upgrade and loading
of board software and
NE software
l Supports in-service upgrades and loading of board software and
NE software.
l Supports remote loading of board software and field
programmable gate array (FPGA).
l Supports error-proof loading and resumable loading.
System
118
Hot patch loading Supports the hot patch loading function. Running software can be
upgraded without being interrupted.
Software package
loading
Software package loading enables NE and board software to be
loaded to an NE at a time. OptiX OSN 580 supports customized
package loading, which prevents the problem of insufficient storage
space from occurring during an upgrade.

8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the packet domain.
8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the TDM domain.
8.3 Upgrade Methods
If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the
equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading and package
diffusion.
System
119
8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the packet domain.
8.1.1 TP-Assist
With the explosive growth of service traffic, metropolitan area networks (MANs) now mainly
carry data services, such as video services, Internet services, and voice over IP (VoIP) services,
instead of traditional voice services. Compared with connection-oriented SDH networks, packet
switched networks (PSNs) feature more flexible networking, complex configurations, and higher
technical requirements on operation and maintenance personnel. TP-Assist dramatically
simplifies PSN operation and maintenance, facilitating deployment of large-scale networks.
Unlike an SDH network, a packet network brings the following challenges:
l More types of network topologies and more complex and time-consuming configurations,
which impose higher requirements on O&M personnel.
l Lack of overheads that indicate the physical status of a network to real-time monitor
services or form a complete alarm system. Once a network is faulty, it is hard to locate the
fault.
TP-Assist supports a wide variety of transmission devices, complies with OAM standards, and
integrates Huawei's powerful NMS U2000 and unique operation and maintenance experience.
It applies to all stages of the network life cycle.
TP-Assist
Network planning
Network topology
planning
Service and hardware
configuration planning
Service configuration
End-to-end service
deployment
Automatic deployment of
alarm management
Service commissioning
One-click service
connectivity test
One-click service
performance test
Automatic test with no
need for any instrument
Routine maintenance
Performance monitoring
and statistics
Fault diagnosis
Intelligent fault diagnosis
IP ping response
Service loop detection
Service path visualization
l Network planning: provides powerful network planning tools and professional network
planning service.
l Service configuration:
Deploys services across microwave and optical fibers in an end-to-end manner.
Automatically deploys alarm management when services are being deployed,
simplifying alarm deployment. Alarms can be reported upon a service interruption.
l Service commissioning:
Provides one-click service connectivity and performance tests.
Automatically tests the delay, throughput, and packet loss rate with no need for any test
instruments.
System
120
l Routine maintenance: monitors performance and collects performance statistics by port,
flow classification, VLAN, VUNI, VUNI group, PW, tunnel, and queue priority.
l Fault diagnosis:
Provides the quick fault diagnosis function, which diagnoses faults at the service, PW,
or tunnel layer by checking connectivity, performance, and configurations.
Provides the IP ping function to test end-to-end connectivity, facilitating quick fault
location.
Locates looped points, checks whether a loop forms due to incorrect service
configurations, and automatically disables looped services in a ring network storm,
therefore minimizing the impact of looped services on the network.
8.1.2 MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM mechanism supported by the equipment includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM.
Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Tunnel OAM
and PW OAM both provide the complete fault detection and locating mechanism.
Tunnel OAM
l Description
The tunnel OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects
at the tunnel layer of an MPLS network. The equipment triggers the protection switching
based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection
can be achieved.
l Objectives and benefits
As a key bearer technology for the scalable next generation network (NGN), MPLS
provides multi-service capabilities with ensured QoS. In addition, MPLS introduces a
unique network layer (tunnel), which may cause some faults. Therefore, an MPLS network
must have the OAM capability.
By providing a tunnel OAM mechanism independent of any upper layer or lower layer, the
tunnel OAM supports the following features:
Provides query-on-demand and consecutive detections so that at any moment you can
learn whether the monitored tunnel has defects.
Detects, analyzes, and locates any defect that occurs, and notifies the NMS of the
relevant information.
Triggers a protection switching immediately after a defect or fault occurs on a link.
Monitors the performance events indicating packet loss ratio, delay, and jitter in real
time and reports them to the NMS.
PW OAM
l Description
The PW OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects
at the PW layer of a network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the
OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be
achieved.
l Objectives and benefits
System
121
The equipment performs PW encapsulation on service packets, and then transmits the
service packets over tunnels. The network consists of two layers: tunnel and PW. Tunnels
use tunnel OAM for maintenance and management, and PWs use PW OAM for
maintenance and management. Currently, the equipment can detect the connectivity of a
certain PW through ping packets, and then reports the result to the NMS.
8.1.3 MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP OAM is defined by MPLS-TP. It is compatible with existing MPLS OAM standards
and focuses on particularity of transport networks.
MPLS-TP OAM is available in two technical solutions: solution based on bidirectional
forwarding detection (BFD) extension and solution based on ITU-T G.8113.1. This section
describes the solution based on ITU-T G.8113.1 extension.
ITU-T G.8113.1-compliant MPLS-TP OAM applies to most data communication equipment
and packet switching equipment, and therefore can provide end-to-end OAM for PSNs
consisting of data communication equipment and packet switching equipment.
Figure 8-1 Application of MPLS-TP OAM on a PSN consisting of data communication
equipment and packet switching equipment
RNC
RNC
PSN
PW1
PW2
MPLS tunnel
NodeB
NodeB
NE1
NE2
MPLS-TP OAM

Equipment with MPLS-TP OAM functionality can meet carrier-class data transmission needs.
8.1.4 ETH OAM
Definition
Based on the MAC layer, the ETH OAM protocol performs OAM operations for the Ethernet
by transmitting OAM packets. This protocol is irrelevant to the transmission medium. The OAM
System
122
packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact on the other layers of the Ethernet.
In addition, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH OAM protocol occupies low bandwidths. Therefore,
this protocol does not affect services carried on links.
ITU-T and IEEE have researches on ETH OAM. Currently, Huawei Ethernet service processing
boards have realized the ETH OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE
802.3ah. Wherein, IEEE 802.1ag define Ethernet service OAM standards, and IEEE 802.3ah
defines Ethernet port OAM standards. As shown in Figure 8-2, the combination of IEEE 802.1ag
and IEEE 802.3ah provides a complete Ethernet OAM solution.
Figure 8-2 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Core Layer
PE1
CE4
PE2
CE3
P
P P
P
CE
1
Router3
Access Layer
Access Layer
Custom Layer
Custom Layer
Router1
Router2
IEEE
802.3ah
IEEE
802.3ah
CE2
OptiX NE
IEEE 802.1ag

l Ethernet service OAM focuses on the maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. Based on
services, Ethernet service OAM implements end-to-end detection in the unit of
"maintenance domain" and performs segmental management on each network segment that
is involved in the same service on a network.
l Ethernet port OAM focuses on the maintenance of point-to-point Ethernet link between
two directly-connected devices in Ethernet in the first mile (EFM). Ethernet port OAM
does not focus on a specific service. It maintains the point-to-point Ethernet link by
performing OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault check, remote
loopback, and selfloop check.
Purpose
With the continuous development of the Ethernet, especially when LANs evolve to WANs,
operators pay more attention to equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations,
administration and maintenance (OAM) in the transmission network are required urgently.
Therefore, ETH OAM is developed.
A comparison of ETH OAM and existing OAM and fault locating methods is provided as
follows:
l When a loopback is performed at a port, all packets on the port are looped back. Therefore,
the loopback method cannot be used if only a specific service needs to be looped back.
System
123
l ETH OAM can detect hardware faults.
l ETH OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.
8.1.5 ATM OAM
This section provides the definition of ATM OAM and describes its purpose.
Definition
ATM OAM is used for detecting and locating ATM faults, and monitoring ATM performance.
In this document, ATM OAM refers to OAM only at the ATM layer and implements various
OAM functions by means of specific ATM OAM cells.
Purpose
ATM OAM provides segment-based ATM OAM between the CE and the PE and end-to-end-
based ATM OAM between CEs.
As shown in Figure 8-3, ATM OAM cells are transmitted and detected between the CE and the
PE, or between the CEs to monitor the ATM link.
Figure 8-3 Typical application of ATM OAM
PE1 PE2
Packet transmission
equipment
CE2
CE1
(NodeB)
(RNC)
Segment check
End-to-end check
Segment check
ATM cell stream (VP level or VC level)

8.1.6 RMON
By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between
different network sections.
Currently, the management of the Ethernet performance for transmission products is relevantly
simple. In the case of the management of Ethernet ports, the management of the performance
data of the ports is required. What's more, as the network is becoming complex, a method for
System
124
managing network sections is required. Thus, the RMON emerges and the RMON should have
the following features:
l All statistics data is saved at the agent and the out-of-service operation on the manager is
supported.
l History data is saved for the fault diagnosis.
l Errors are detected and reported.
l Detailed data is provided.
l Multiple management stations are supported.
Based on the preceding purposes, the RMON defines a serial of statistic formats and functions
to realize the data exchange between the control stations and detection stations that complies
with the RMON standards. To meet the requirements of different networks, the RMON provides
flexible detection modes and control mechanism. What's more, the RMON provides error
diagnosis, planning and information receiving of the performance events of the entire network.
8.1.7 PRBS
Boards with E1 ports provide the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) functional module,
which is used for network self-test and maintenance. You can determine whether the working
channel on the UNI/NNI side is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS
test.
The PRBS functional module is equivalent to a simple instrument that transmits and receives
unframed services.
Bit errors detected by the PRBS functional module help diagnose the faults on service paths and
locate the faults on fibers or boards. By using the PRBS function, you can analyze the local NE
and the entire network. Therefore, you can perform a test without a real instrument during the
deployment or fault locating.
8.1.8 CES Alarm Transmission
The OptiX OSN equipment uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently
transmit alarms.
CES alarm transparent transmission involves transmitting local CES alarms to the remote end,
and inserting corresponding alarms to notify the remote end of faults in the local end. Depending
on the position where the alarm is generated, CES alarm transparent transmission can be between
AC sides, and from the NNI side to the AC side.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission Between AC Sides
There are two scenarios where CES alarms are transparently transmitted between AC sides.
l The fault information on the AC link or port is transmitted through the PSN as follows:
System
125
Figure 8-4 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (1)
PSN
PE1
LSP
PW
AC1
AC2
RNC
PE2
NodeB

If PE1 detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC1 side, PE1 returns RDI to upstream
and informs PE2 of the fault through the L field of control word. Upon receiving the control
word, PE2 reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm and inserts AIS to the AC2
side.
l The service alarms on the AC side are transparently transmitted through the PSN as follows:
Figure 8-5 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (2)
PSN
PE1
LSP
PW
AC1
AC2
RNC
PE2
NodeB

If the RNC detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC2 side, the RNC returns RDI
to PE2; PE2 reports the RAI alarm and informs PE1 of the fault through the L/M field of
control word. Upon receiving the control word, PE1 reports the RAI alarm and returns RDI
to AC1.
NOTE
The SAToP encapsulation mode does not support the M field, and therefore cannot transparently
transmit the RAI alarm.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission from the NNI Side to the AC Side
Figure 8-6 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side.
System
126
Figure 8-6 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side
PSN
PE1
LSP
PW
AC1
AC2
RNC
PE2
NodeB

When detecting that packet loss ratio continuously beyond the preset threshold, PE2 inserts the
AIS alarm into AC2, and uses the R field in the control word to transmit the information to PE1.
Then, PE1 reports the RAI alarm based on the R field.
8.1.9 Port Mirroring
For the existing complex networks, OptiX OSN equipment has already provided various
effective fault diagnosis methods. However, the methods require path overheads or even
interrupt service. Therefore, a fast fault diagnosis method that does not affect services is urgently
required. Port mirroring effectively addresses this requirement.
Port mirroring has the following features:
l Port mirroring applies to online fault diagnosis. It replicates the traffic at one port to another
port, and then an analyzer is used to locate faults.
l After port mirroring is used, traffic can be monitored in real time using an analyzer.
As shown in Figure 8-7, a port on NE1 is the mirror source port and another port on NE1 is the
mirror destination port. NE1 replicates the traffic at the mirror source port to the mirror
destination port. An analyzer is used to analyze the traffic or to monitor the traffic in real time
without affecting the services.
Figure 8-7 Typical networking for port mirroring

RNC

NodeB

NE2

Normal Service

Mirror Service

NE3
Analyst
NE1
(Monitored/Monitor)
Mirror Source
Function Point
Mirror
Observation Point
System
127

8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the TDM domain.
8.2.1 PRBS
Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining
the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line
direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are
detected in a PRBS test.
For details, see PRBS.
8.2.2 ETH OAM
For details, see ETH OAM.
8.2.3 RMON
By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between
different network sections.
For details, see RMON.
8.2.4 Data Test Frame
The test frame is a data packet that is used to test the connectivity status of the network on the
SDH side that transmits Ethernet services. The test frame is mainly used for commissioning
Ethernet services or locating Ethernet service faults.
Configuring test frames does not affect services.
The test frame function complies with the Huawei internal standard, and can be transmitted and
received only between VCTRUNK ports.
8.3 Upgrade Methods
If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the
equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading and package
diffusion.
Table 8-5 lists the upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550.
System
128
Table 8-5 Upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550
Upgrade
Method
Package Loading Package Diffusion
Definition With a software package
description file, a software package
functions as a logical package of
required software. This logical
package can be uploaded to
upgrade an entire NE.
With a software package
description file, a software package
functions as a logical package of
required software. The logical
package is diffused and almost
synchronously loaded to all NEs on
a network. This upgrade method is
more efficient.
Application
scenario
l One NE needs to be upgraded.
l System control boards and other
boards must support package
loading.
l There are CF cards on system
control boards.
l More than one NE needs to be
upgraded.
l System control boards and other
boards must support package
loading.
l There are CF cards on system
control boards.
Characteristic l All the boards on an NE can be
upgraded on a unified GUI.
l There is no need to care about
which boards to upgrade or
which files to update.
l All the boards on an NE can be
upgraded on a unified GUI.
l There is no need to care about
which boards to upgrade or
which files to update.
l Software packages are diffused.
l Network load and network
bandwidth are both shared.
Applicable
version
V100R003C00 and later versions
support this upgrade method.
V100R003C00 and later versions
support this upgrade method.
System
129
9 Security Management
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 allows NE security management to be implemented by various means.
9.1 Authentication Management
For security concerns, only an authenticated user can log in to an NE.
9.2 Authorization Management
Authorization management allows different authorities for different users when they operate an
NE. This effectively protects an NE against inappropriate operations.
9.3 Network Security Management
The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in networks, is the precondition
for the NMS to manage the NEs.
9.4 System Security Management
The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly.
9.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 550 supports system security log management and Syslog management.
System
Product Description 9 Security Management
130
9.1 Authentication Management
For security concerns, only an authenticated user can log in to an NE.
l NE login management: You can successfully log in to an NE only after entering the correct
user name and password.
l NE user switching: One client allows only one user to operate an NE at a time. For this
reason, if multiple NE users log in to an NE, the NE users need to be switched to ensure
that the configuration data is unique.
l Forcibly making other NE users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous
configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the
NE, one user of system level or debugging level can forcibly make other users exit from
the NE.
l You can query users that have logged in to an NE.
9.2 Authorization Management
Authorization management allows different authorities for different users when they operate an
NE. This effectively protects an NE against inappropriate operations.
l Management of NE users
Five user authority levels are available in an ascending order: monitoring level,
operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level.
Based on network management systems, NE users are classified into LCT NE users,
EMS NE users, CMD NE users, and general NE users.
You can create a user, assign an authority level for the user, and specify the user flag.
You can change a user name, a password, an authority level, and a user flag.
You can delete a user.
l Management of NE user groups:
By default, five user groups are available with authorities in an ascending order: monitor
group, operator group, maintenance personnel group, administrator group, and system
administrator user group.
You can query the group to which a user belongs.
9.3 Network Security Management
The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in networks, is the precondition
for the NMS to manage the NEs.
Communication between the NMS and NEs can be implemented based on the Access Control
List (ACL), Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), or Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service
(RADIUS) protocol.
System
131
ACL Protocol
ACL rules are configured to filter received IP packets. This controls the data traffic on networks
and protects against malicious attacks.
You can set basic ACL rules or advanced ACL rules, based on the required system security level.
l For an NE that requires a low security level, you can configure basic ACL rules so that the
NE checks only the source addresses of received IP packets.
l For an NE that requires a high security level, you can configure advanced ACL rules. In
this case, the NE checks the source addresses, sink addresses, source ports, sink ports, and
protocol types of received IP packets.
If both basic and advanced ACL rules are configured, an NE uses only advanced ACL rules to
check received IP packets.
In addition, ACL rules support the following operations:
l Queries of ACL rules
l Modification of ACL rules
l Deletion of ACL rules
SSL Protocol
The SSL protocol is used to protect the integrity and security of data.
RADIUS Protocol
RADIUS provides a complete network security solution. After a RADIUS server verifies that
the user name and password of a user are valid, the server allows a certain authority for the user,
and provides services to the user.
Carriers' RADIUS servers manage all the user accounts and user attributes of the 550. To log in
to an OptiX OSN 550 NE, you must apply for a user account to the carrier. When you attempt
to log in to an OptiX OSN 550 NE, the RADIUS server verifies the user name and password
that you have entered. If the verification fails, a login error is reported.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the shielding function when being connected to a network port
management device. That is, when being connected to a network port on an OptiX OSN 550
NE, a network port management device manages only the connected OptiX OSN 550 NE, and
cannot access the other devices that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 NE through ECCs.
With this function, even if an OptiX OSN 550 NE in the insecure domain is accessed illegally,
the NEs that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 NE will not be illegally operated.
Security FTP
Security File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) works at the secure shell (SSH) connection layer, and
extends support for FTP security based on SSH-provided fundamental services like encryption
and authentication.
l In security, FTP transmits plain text and supports only password authentication, whereas
SFTP transmits cipher text and supports both password authentication and cipher key
authentication. Authentication by cipher key is safer than authentication by password.
System
132
l SFTP needs to perform encryption and decryption and theoretically has a lower
transmission efficiency than FTP. However, benefiting from specialized improvement
design, SFTP generally has a higher transmission efficiency than FTP.
l SFTP can load packages, upload/download databases, upload log files, and upload/
download a single file. NEs can work only as SFTP clients and cannot work as SFTP
servers. In addition, SFTP works based on TCP connections and requires IP routes between
NEs and SSH servers. Therefore, SFTP service can be deployed only at gateway NEs.
9.4 System Security Management
The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly.
l Uniqueness of accounts: All accounts held in an NE are unique.
l Complexity of accounts: An account consists of 4 to 16 characters, including letters in lower
case and upper case.
l Length of passwords: A password consists of 8 to 16 characters. To change a password, a
user needs to enter the original password once and a new password twice.
l Complexity of passwords:
A new password consists of at least three of the following character types: lower case
letters, upper case letters, numbers, and special characters.
A new password must be different from the previous five passwords.
A new password must be different from an account name, either in the normal written
format or in the reversely written format.
A new password must contain two or more characters different from those of the old
password.
l Active period of a password:
Each password has an active period. After the active period of a password expires, the
password can be used for only three logins.
By default, the active period of a password is 0 days, indicating permanent validity.
For a common user's password, the shortest active period is one day. A common user
can change the password only after the shortest active period expires.
l Storage of passwords: Encrypted passwords are held in the system beyond queries.
l Management of accounts: Accounts can be created, modified, deleted, and queried.
l Query of online users: Users of the administrator group can query other online users.
9.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 550 supports system security log management and Syslog management.
System Security Log Management
The system security log of an NE records all setting operations and operation results on the NE.
By querying the system security log, an administrator can trace and check operations of users.
l You can query the system security log of an NE.
System
133
l You can forward the system security log to the Syslog server.
Syslog Management
The Syslog service is used for the security management of NEs. Different information is
transmitted to the Syslog server in a format compliant with the Syslog protocol so that
maintenance personnel can monitor NEs easily.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following functions related to the Syslog protocol:
l Enabling and disabling the Syslog protocol
l Setting the transmission mode of the Syslog protocol to UDP (by default) or TCP or TLS
l Adding or deleting Syslog servers
l Configuration of multiple Syslog servers and transmission of logs to multiple servers at the
same time
l Reporting relevant alarms when the Syslog server fails to communicate with NEs
Figure 9-1 illustrates log transmission on a network by means of the Syslog protocol. To ensure
the security of system logs, at least two Syslog servers are required on a transmission network.
NEs communicate with Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. NEs communicate with each
other in many modes, such as HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCC.
Figure 9-1 Log transmission by means of the Syslog protocol
NMS
Syslog server A
Syslog server B Real-time
security log
TCP/IP
NE A
(client)
NE B
NE C
(client)
NE D

NOTE
A Syslog server is a workstation or server that stores the system logs of all NEs on a network.
Forwarding gateway NEs receive system logs from other NEs, and then forward these system logs to Syslog
servers, for example, NE A and NE C in Figure 9-1.
When NEs communicate in IP mode, each NE can directly communicate with two different
Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. Therefore, you need to configure the IP addresses
and port numbers of the Syslog servers on an NE. The NE transmits the system log to two Syslog
servers by using the automatic routing function of the IP protocol. You do not need to configure
any forwarding gateway NE.
When NEs communicate in ECC mode, the NEs that are not directly connected to Syslog servers
cannot communicate with Syslog servers. The logs of these NEs need to be transmitted to the
gateway NEs that can communicate with Syslog servers directly. Then, the gateway NEs forward
System
134
the logs to Syslog servers. Therefore, you need to configure forwarding gateway NEs. For
example, you can configure NE A as the forwarding NE of NE D.
System
135
10 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
This chapter describes general specifications, packet performance indicators, TDM performance
indicators, port specifications, optical module specifications, indicator status explanation, and
environment indicators of the equipment.
10.1 General Specifications
This section lists the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power
supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability.
10.2 Packet Performance Indicators
This section lists the equipment's packet performance indicators.
10.3 TDM Performance Indicators
This section lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators.
10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the equipment supports.
10.5 Optical Port Specifications
This section lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical
ports and GE/10GE optical ports.
10.6 Colored Optical Ports
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical ports of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
10.7 Electrical Port Specifications
This section lists the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports
include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical
ports.
10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications
This section lists the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports,
asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, external clock, and external time ports.
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation
This section provides status explanation for indicators on boards.
System
Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
136
10.10 Safety Certification
The OptiX OSN 550 has passed many safety certifications.
10.11 Environmental Specifications
The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environments for storage, transportation, and operation.
System
137
10.1 General Specifications
This section lists the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power
supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability.
Table 10-1 lists the general specifications of the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 10-1 General specifications of the OptiX OSN 550
Item Description
Dime
nsion
s
88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D)
Weig
ht
3.5 kg (net weight of a chassis that contains one fan board and two PIU boards)
Powe
r
consu
mptio
n
l Maximum power consumption: 300 W
l Typical power consumption in Hybrid mode: 149 W
board configuration for typical power consumption: 2 x PCXLX + 3 x EM6F +
1 x MD1 + 1 x FAN + 2 x PIU.
SLO
T
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 1
(EXT
)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 2
(EXT
)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8
(CST/CSH)
SLO
T
1
0
(PIU)
SLO
T
1
1
(FAN
)
SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (PCXLX)
SLOT 1 (EM6F)
SLOT 3 (MD1)
SLOT 2 (EM6F)
SLOT 4 (EM6F)
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 8 (PCXLX)
l Typical power consumption in TDM mode: 67 W
board configuration for typical power consumption: 2CXL+1SL1Q+2SP3D
+1FAN+2PIU.
SLO
T
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7
(CST/CSH)
SLOT 5
(EXT)
SLOT 3
(EXT)
SLOT 4
(EXT)
SLOT 6
(EXT)
SLOT 8
(CST/CSH)
SLO
T
1
0
(PIU)
SLO
T
1
1
(FAN
)
SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CXL)
SLOT 1 (SL1Q)
SLOT 6 (SP3D)
SLOT 4 (SP3D)
SLOT
91
(PIU)
SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 8 (CXL)
Heat
consu
mptio
n
l Maximum heat consumption: 1024 BTU/h
l Typical heat consumption in Hybrid mode: 508 BTU/h
l Typical heat consumption in TDM mode: 229 BTU/h
Powe
r
suppl
y
perfo
rman
ce
l DC power supply
Rated voltage: -48 V or -60 V
Voltage range: -38.4 V to -72 V
l AC power supply
Rated voltage: 110 V or 220 V
Voltage range: 100 V to 240 V
System
138
Item Description
Fuse
capac
ity
l DC power supply: 20 A
l AC power supply: 5 A
Elect
roma
gneti
c
comp
atibili
ty
Complies with EMC Class A.
Predi
cted
reliab
ility
l System availability: 0.9999965
l Annual average repair rate: < 1.5%
l Mean time to repair (MTTR): 1 hour
l Mean time between failures (MTBF): 33.08 years

NOTE
In the case of OptiX OSN 550 equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat
consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each
other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
10.2 Packet Performance Indicators
This section lists the equipment's packet performance indicators.
Table 10-2 lists the OptiX OSN 550's packet performance indicators.
Table 10-2 Packet system performance specifications
It
e
m
Specifications
Pr
ot
ec
tio
n
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
tunnel
automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
64
NOTE
Tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share
resources.
System
139
It
e
m
Specifications
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
PW APS
Numbe
r of
MPLS/
MPLS-
TP PW
APS
protecti
on
groups
64
NOTE
Tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP
PW APS share resources.
Numbe
r of
bound
membe
rs
512
MRPS Numbe
r of
rings
4
Numbe
r of
nodes
per ring
64
Numbe
r of
virtual
nodes
per
ring
a
32
Numbe
r of
multica
st
services
l Number of multicast services supported by an NE: 16
l Number of multicast services supported by a ring: 8
Link-state
pass
through
(LPT)
16
Link
aggregatio
n group
(LAG)
Numbe
r of
LAGs
16
System
140
It
e
m
Specifications
Numbe
r of
membe
rs in a
LAG
8
Multiple
Spanning
Tree
Protocol
(MSTP)
Numbe
r of
instanc
es
support
ed by a
port
1
Numbe
r of port
groups
1
Numbe
r of
ports
provide
d by
port
groups
16
Ethernet
ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
8
Linear
multiplex
section
protection
(LMSP) on
the packet
plane
8
M
ai
nt
en
an
ce
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAM
128
NOTE
Tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM,
ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM (one MRPS ring uses two OAM resources) share
resources.
System
141
It
e
m
Specifications
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
PW OAM
128
NOTE
Tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM,
ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM (one MRPS ring uses two OAM resources) share
resources.
ETH OAM
(MPLS/
MPLS-TP
tunnel
OAM,
MPLS/
MPLS-TP
PW OAM,
ETH
OAM, and
MRPS
OAM
share
resources.)
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
domain
s (MDs)
64
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
associat
ions
(MAs)
64
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
associat
ion end
points
(MEPs)
64
Numbe
r of
mainten
ance
associat
ion
interme
diate
points
(MIPs)
64
MRPS
OAM
128
NOTE
l One MRPS ring uses two OAM resources. MRPS OAM is automatically created
during the creation of an MRPS ring.
l Tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM,
ETH OAM, and MRPS OAM share resources.
System
142
It
e
m
Specifications
ATM
OAM
l Number of local services: 128
l Number of remote services: 256
Se
rv
ic
es
E-Line
services
1k
NOTE
Native ETH services and ETH PWE3 services (VPWSs) share resources.
E-LAN
services
Numbe
r of E-
LAN
services
(E-
LAN
VSIs)
support
ed by an
NE
(VSI is
short
for
virtual
switch
instanc
e.)
l Native ETH services: 1
l ETH PWE3 services (VPLSs): 128
NOTE
Native ETH services and ETH PWE3 services (VPLSs) cannot coexist
on the same NE.
Numbe
r of
logical
ports
support
ed by a
VSI
l Native ETH services: 1k
Numbe
r of
virtual
user-
networ
k
interfac
es (V-
UNIs)
support
ed by an
NE
(VPLS)
Number of V-UNIs Number of VLANs
32 4096
64 2047
128 1023
256 511
512 255
1024 127
System
143
It
e
m
Specifications
Numbe
r of split
horizon
groups
support
ed by a
VSI
l Native ETH services: 1
Numbe
r of
logical
ports
support
ed by an
NE
1k
CES
services
256
ATM
services
Numbe
r of
local
services
128
Numbe
r of
remote
services
256
M
ult
i-
Li
nk
Po
int
-
to
-
Po
int
Pr
ot
oc
ol
(
M
L-
Number of
ML-PPP
groups
supported
by an NE
64
Number of
PPP links
supported
by an NE
504
System
144
It
e
m
Specifications
P
P
P)
Number of
member
links
supported
in an ML-
PPP group
16
IG
M
P
sn
oo
pi
ng
Number of
multicast
groups
512
Number of
members
in a
multicast
group
1K
Q
oS
Number of
port
weighted
random
early
discard
(WRED)
policies
8
Number of
virtual
user-
network
interface
(V-UNI)
ingress
policies
256
Number of
port
policies
256
System
145
It
e
m
Specifications
Number of
Differentia
ted
Services
(DiffServ)
domains
8
Number of
port flows
512
Number of
V-UNI
ingress
flows
512
Number of
traffic
classificati
on rules
1
Number of
access
control
lists
(ACLs)
512
Ot
he
rs
Number of
Tunnels
l Unidirectional: 1K
l Bidirectional: 512
NOTE
l One bidirectional Tunnel is counted as two unidirectional Tunnels.
l If Tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and Tunnels must not exceed 1K.
If Tunnels carry PWs, the Tunnels are not counted and the number of carried
PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each Tunnel carries one PW, the number
of Tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
l One MPRS ring uses 4 x N tunnels (N is the number of nodes on the MPRS
ring.) Tunnels are automatically assigned during the configuration of MRPS.
Number of
static PWs
1K
NOTE
If Tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and Tunnels must not exceed 1K. If
Tunnels carry PWs, the Tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs
must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each Tunnel carries one PW, the number of
Tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
Number of
MS-PWs
128
Number of
QinQ links
1K
System
146
It
e
m
Specifications
MAC
addresses
Numbe
r of
static
MAC
address
es
support
ed by an
E-LAN
512
Numbe
r of
MAC
address
es
support
ed by E-
LAN
services
16K
Numbe
r of
MAC
address
es
support
ed by an
NE
16K
VLAN ID
range
supported
by a port
1 to 4094
a: MRPS supports protection on intersecting rings. When two rings intersect, one virtual
intersecting node can be created to contain the two most remote physical intersecting nodes.
If one physical intersecting node fails, services can travel across the rings through the other
node. When a ring intersects with multiple rings, a virtual intersecting node must be created
to contain the two most remote physical intersecting nodes of the ring and each other ring.

10.3 TDM Performance Indicators
This section lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators.
Table 10-3 lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators.
System
147
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features
Item Description
Service Service Category Maximum
Receiving
Capability
Service Port
SDH service 26xSTM-1 l S-1.1,
L-1.1, and
L-1.2
optical
ports
l STM-1
SFP
electrical
ports
l Optical
port: LC
l Electrical
port: SAA
straight
female
14xSTM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1
and L-4.2
optical ports
LC
2xSTM-16 S-16.1, L-16.1
and L-16.2
optical ports
LC
PDH service 252xE1/T1 E1 (75/120-
ohm)/T1
(100-ohm)
electrical
ports
Anea 96
18xE3/T3 E3 (75-ohm)/
T3 (75-ohm)
electrical
ports
SMB
System
148
Item Description
Ethernet service:
l Ethernet private line
(EPL) services
line (EVPL) services
l Ethernet private LAN
(EPLAN) services
(based on the IEEE
802.1d bridge)
LAN (EVPLAN)
services (based on the
IEEE 802.1q and
802.1ad bridges)
l FE optical
port: 24
l FE
electrical
port: 48
l FE optical
port:
100BASE-
BX,
100BASE-
FX,
100BASE-
LX,
100BASE-
VX, and
100BASE-
ZX
l FE
electrical
port:
10/100BA
SE-T(X)
l Optical
port: LC
l Electrical
port: RJ45
24xGE l GE optical
port:
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
VX/ZX
l GE
electrical
port:
1000BAS
E-T
l Optical
port: LC
l Electrical
port: RJ45
TDM
network-
level
protection
SNCP l SNCP at the VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 levels
Ring MSP l Ring MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels
Linear MSP l Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels
l Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 linear MSP protection
groups: 13
Maintena
nce
PRBS Supported
System
149
Item Description
Port
mirroring
EFS8/EGS4 supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet
service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the
services.
l Supports ingress and egress port mirroring.
Synchroni
zation
Physical
layer clocks
l Including external clocks, line clocks, tributary clocks, and
internal clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms
(a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port).
l Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard
SSM, and extended SSM protocols
l Tributary retiming of tributary clocks
l Locked mode, holdover mode, and free-run mode
Synchronous
Ethernet
EGS4 supports synchronous Ethernet clocks.
l Synchronous Ethernet clock that complies with ITU-T G.
8261 and ITU-T G.8262.
l Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks:
FE/GE
l Clock source selection algorithm based on the
synchronization status message (SSM) protocol
l Clock frequency stability (trace mode): < 50 ppb
NOTE

10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the equipment supports.
Table 10-4 lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the OptiX OSN 550
supports.
Table 10-4 Power consumption and weight of each board that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board Power Consumption (Room
temperature (25C))(W)
Weight (kg)
PCX l PCXLX: 45
l PCXX: 44.5
l PCXLG: 37
l PCXGA/PCXGB: 36.5
0.80
CXL 21 0.50
MD1 12.2 0.50
System
150
Board Power Consumption (Room
temperature (25C))(W)
Weight (kg)
EM6T 10.4 0.37
EM6F 11.3 0.40
EF8F 23 0.55
EG4C l 4xGE optical ports: 12.5
l 4xGE electrical ports: 11.0
0.45
EX1 13.1 0.50
CQ1 16 0.50
SL1D 3.5 0.30
SL4D 3.7 0.30
SL1Q 4.5 0.30
SP3D 11.9 0.85
PL3T 4.5 0.30
EFS8 13.0 0.65
EGS4 27.5 0.65
EGT1 8.3 0.60
DMD2 0.5 0.72
AUX 2.2 0.30
PIU 0.5 0.12
APIU 20.0 1.93
FAN 12.0 0.30

10.5 Optical Port Specifications
This section lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical
ports and GE/10GE optical ports.
Specifications of STM-1 Optical Ports
Table 10-5 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports.
System
151
Table 10-5 Specifications of the two-fiber bidirectional STM-1 optical ports
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Optical port type S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Transmission distance
(km)
15 40 80
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Launched optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-28 -34 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE
Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type
Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1"
represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1"

Table 10-6 lists the specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports.
Table 10-6 Specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional STM-1 optical ports
Parameter Value
Line code pattern NRZ
Type of optical interface S-1.1 L-1.1
(km)
15 40
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
System
152
Parameter Value
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
(dBm)
-28 -28 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10
System
153
Item Value
NOTE
Explanation for optical port type "S-4.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "4"

Table 10-8 lists the specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports.
Table 10-8 Specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional STM-4 optical ports
Paramete
r
Value
Nominal
bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Type of
optical
interface
S-4.1 L-4.1
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
15 40
Type of
fiber
Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
System
154
Paramete
r
Value
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to +3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

Item Value
Transmission
distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-5 to 0 -2 to +3 -2 to +3
(dBm)
-18 -27 -28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
0 -9 -9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2
System
155
Item Value
NOTE
Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits
"16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits
Explanation for optical port type "L-16.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits

Specifications of FE Optical Ports
Table 10-10 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports.
Table 10-10 Specifications of the two-fiber bidirectional FE optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10

System
156
Table 10-11 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical
ports.
Table 10-11 Specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional FE optical ports
Parameter Value
Type of optical interface 100BASE-BX
(km)
15 40
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating transmit
wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive
wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
(dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.5 10

Specifications of GE Optical Ports
Table 10-12 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports.
Table 10-12 Specifications of the two-fiber bidirectional GE optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.5 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
System
157
Item Value
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9 9 9

NOTE
With different SFP modules, the equipment provides GE optical ports with different types and transmission
distances.
Table 10-13 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical
ports.
Table 10-13 Specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional GE optical ports
Paramete
r
Value
Type of
optical
interface
1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
Transmiss
ion
distance
(km)
10 40
Type of
fiber
Operating
transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
System
158
Paramete
r
Value
Operating
receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to +3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
9 9

Specifications of 10GE Optical Ports
Table 10-14 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports.
Table 10-14 Specifications of the two-fiber bidirectional 10GE optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-SR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-SW
(WAN)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-LW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)
/10GBASE-EW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)
/10GBASE-ZW
(WAN)
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
0.3 10 40 80
Operating
wavelength
(nm)
840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3 -8.2 to 0.5 -4.7 to +4 0 to 4
System
159
Item Value
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-7.5 -12.6 -14.1 -21
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1 0.5 -1 -7
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
3 3.5 3 3

Table 10-15 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE single-fiber bidirectional
optical ports.
Table 10-15 Specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional 10GE optical ports
Item Value
Optical port
type
10GBASE-LR (LAN)
/10GBASE-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER (LAN)
/10GBASE-EW (WAN)
Optical fiber
type
Transmission
distance (km)
10 40
Operating
transmit
wavelength
(nm)
1330 1270 1330 1270
Operating
receive
wavelength
(nm)
1270 1330 1270 1330
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
-5 to 0 1 to 5
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
-14 -15
System
160
Item Value
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
0.5 0.5
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
3.5 3.5

10.6 Colored Optical Ports
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical ports of the OptiX OSN
equipment.
GE Optical Port
Table 10-16 lists the parameters specified for the colored GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN
equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Table 10-16 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2
System
161

10GE Optical Port
Table 10-17 and Table 10-18 list the parameters specified for the colored 10GE optical ports
of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Table 10-17 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s
l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Transmission distance (km) 70
range (dBm)
0 to 4
Operating wavelength range
(nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) l 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23
l 1571 nm: -22
l 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm) -9
(dB)
8.2

Table 10-18 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s
l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-1 to +2 -1 to +3
System
162
Parameter Value
DWDM
Central frequency
(THz)
192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10 10
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-17 -24
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-1 -9
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5 8.2

STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Optical Port
Table 10-19 and Table 10-20 list the parameters specified for the colored STM-1/STM-4/
STM-16 optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Table 10-19 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit
rate
155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s
(STM-16)
Transmission
distance (km)
40 80
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of
20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 -9
System
163
Parameter Value
CWDM
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2

Table 10-20 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate 2,488,320 kbit/s (STM-16)
(km)
120
range (dBm)
-1 to +3
Central frequency (THz) 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency
deviation (GHz)
10
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -28
Minimum overload (dBm) -9
(dB)
8.2

10.7 Electrical Port Specifications
This section lists the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports
include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical
ports.
Specifications of E1/T1 Electrical Ports
Table 10-21 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports.
System
164
Table 10-21 Specifications of E1/T1 electrical ports
Electrical Port Type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s
Code pattern B8ZS code, AMI code HDB3 code
Waveform at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Signal bit rate at the output port
Allowed attenuation at the input
port
Permitted frequency deviation
at the input port
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.
824.
Anti-interference capability at
the input port
- Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Reflection attenuation at the
input and output ports
- Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Combined jitter
Jitter transfer function - Complies with ITU-T G.742.
Port type Anea 96

Specifications of E3/T3 Electrical Ports
Table 10-22 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports.
Table 10-22 Specifications of E3/T3 electrical ports
Item Value
Bit rate 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s
Code pattern HDB3 B3ZS
Connector SMB SMB
Port impedance (ohm) 75 75
Signal bit rate at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Permitted frequency deviation at
the input port
System
165
Item Value
port
Input jitter tolerance Complies with
ITU-T G.823.

Specifications of STM-1 Electrical Ports
Table 10-23 lists the specifications of the
OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 electrical ports.
Table 10-23 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports
Item Value
Bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Code pattern CMI
Connector SAA straight female
Signal bit rate at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Permitted frequency deviation at
the input port
port
Input jitter tolerance

Specifications of CES/ATM/IMA Service Electrical Ports
Table 10-24 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical
ports.
Table 10-24 Specifications of CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports
Item Value
Standard compliance ITU-T G.703/G.823
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Pair in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair
System
166
Item Value
Port type Anea 96

Specifications of Ethernet Electrical Ports
Table 10-25 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports.
Table 10-25 Specifications of Ethernet electrical ports
Service Port Port Rate Code Pattern Port Type
FE electrical
port
10BASE-T Manchester coding
signals
RJ45
FE electrical
port
100BASE-T(X) MLT-3 coding
signals
GE electrical
port
1000BASE-T 4D-PAM5 coding
signals

10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications
This section lists the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports,
asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, external clock, and external time ports.
External Clock Ports
Table 10-26 Specifications of external clock ports
Item Value
External synchronous source 2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz
(in compliance with ITU-T G.703)
Frequency accuracy In compliance with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in or pull-out range
Noise generation
Noise toleration
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Synchronization clock
transfer accuracy
< 50 ppb
System
167

External Time Ports
Table 10-27 Specifications of external time ports
Item Value
Port type l 1PPS+TOD
l DCLS
Electrical specifications RS-422
Protocol type l 1PPS+TOD: UBX and NMEA
l DCLS: IRIG-B (DC)

Synchronous Data Ports
Table 10-28 Specifications of synchronous data ports
Item Value
Transmission channel Byte F1 in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) 64
Port type Codirectional
Port characteristics In compliance with ITU-T G.703

Asynchronous Data Ports
Table 10-29 Specifications of asynchronous data ports
Item Value
Transmission channel User-defined byte in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) 19.2
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-232

System
168
Orderwire Ports
Table 10-30 Specifications of orderwire ports
Item Value
Transmission channel Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead
Orderwire type Addressing call
Pair in each direction One symmetrical pair
Impedance (ohm) 600

Outdoor Cabinet Monitoring Ports
Table 10-31 Specifications of outdoor cabinet monitoring ports
Item Value
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-485

10.9 Indicator Status Explanation
This section provides status explanation for indicators on boards.
NOTE
There is no indicator on the OptiX OSN 550 chassis.
Table 10-32 provides status explanation for indicators on the boards that the OptiX OSN 550
supports.
Table 10-32 Status explanation for indicators on the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Indicator State Meaning Applicable Board
STAT On (green) The board is working
properly.
PCX (PCXLX/
PCXX/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB)/
CXL/MD1/EM6T/
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
EX1/CQ1/SL1D/
SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/
PL3T/EFS8/EGS4/
EGT1/AUX
On (red) The board hardware
is faulty.
Off l The board is not
working or
created.
l There is no power
supplied to the
board.
System
169
PROG Blinks on (green) and
off at 100 ms
intervals
Software is being
loaded to the board
during the power-on
or resetting process
of the board.
PCX (PCXLX/
PCXX/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB)/
CXL/EM6T/EM6F/
EFS8/EGS4
Blinks on (green) and
off at 300 ms
intervals
The board software is
in BIOS boot state
during the power-on
of the board.
Blinks on (red) and
off at 100 ms
intervals
The BOOTROM
self-check fails
during the power-on
of the board.
On (green) l The upper layer
software is being
initialized.
l The software is
running properly.
On (red) l The memory self-
check fails or
loading upper
layer software
fails during the
power-on or
resetting process
of the board.
l The logic file or
upper layer
software is lost
during the
running process
of the board.
l The pluggable
storage card is
faulty.
Off The board is not
powered on or works
in low-power mode.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working
properly.
PCX (PCXLX/
PCXX/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB)/
CXL
System
170
On (red) The clock source is
lost or a clock
switchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system/service is
normal.
PCX (PCXLX/
PCXX/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB)/
CXL/MD1/EM6T/
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/
EX1/CQ1/SL1D/
SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/
PL3T/EFS8/EGS4/
EGT1/AUX
On (red) A critical or major
alarm occurs in the
system/service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote
alarm occurs in the
system/service.
Off l For a PCX board:
In an
unprotected
system, there
is no power
supplied to the
system.
In a 1+1
protected
system, the
board works
as the standby
one.
l For a service
board, no service
is configured.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected
system, the board
works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected
system, the board
has been
activated.
PCX (PCXLX/
PCXX/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB)/
CXL/EGT1
Off l In a 1+1 protected
system, the board
works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected
system, the board
is not activated.
System
171
LINK/LINK1/
LINK2
On (green) The GE port is
connected correctly,
but is not receiving or
transmitting data.
EM6F/EGT1
Blinks (yellow) The GE port is
receiving or
transmitting data.
Off The GE port is not
connected or is
abnormal.
OPM Blinks (red) three
times every second,
300 ms on and 300
ms off
The received optical
power is excessively
high.
EGT1
Blinks (red) once
every second, 300 ms
on and 700 ms off
The received optical
power is excessively
low.
Blinks (yellow) three
times every second,
300 ms on and 300
ms off
The transmitted
optical power is
excessively high.
Blinks (yellow) once
on and 700 ms off
The transmitted
optical power is
excessively low.
System
172
Off Any of the following
states (including but
not limited to)
occurs:
l The optical power
is normal.
l No optical
module is
installed.
l An incorrect
optical module is
installed.
l The E2ROM
information about
the installed
optical module
cannot be read
correctly.
l The optical fiber
is disconnected or
the port is
disabled.
LOS/LOS1/LOS2/
LOS3/LOS4
On (red) The optical port on
the board is reporting
an R_LOS alarm.
PCX (PCXLX/
PCXLG)/SL1D/
SL4D/SL1Q/CXL/
CQ1
Blinks (red) three
times every second
The optical port on
the board receives
too strong power.
Blinks (red) once
every second
The optical port on
the board receives
too weak power.
Blinks (red) once
every three seconds
The optical port on
the board is reporting
an MS_RDI alarm.
Off The optical port on
the board is free of
R_LOS alarms.
L/A On (green) The port is connected
correctly (link up),
but is not receiving or
transmitting data.
PCX (PCXLX/
PCXX/PCXLG/
PCXGA/PCXGB)/
EF8F/EG4C/EX1/
EGS4
System
173
Blinks (red) three
times every second,
300 ms on and 300
ms off
The port on the board
receives too strong
power.
Blinks (red) once
on and 700 ms off
The port on the board
receives too weak
power.
Blinks (orange) The port is connected
correctly (link up),
and is receiving and
transmitting data.
Off The optical fiber is
not connected to the
port, or the port is
abnormal (link down/
LOS).
PWR On (green) Power is being
supplied.
PIU
Off Power is off or power
supplies are
connected
incorrectly.
FAN On (green) The FAN board is
working properly.
FAN
On (red) The FAN board is
free of critical/major
alarms.
On (yellow) The FAN board is
free of minor alarms.
Off The FAN board is not
powered on or is not
installed.
CRIT/MAJ/MIN On (red) The NE has a critical/
major alarm.
FAN
On (yellow) The NE has a minor
alarm.
Off The NE is free of
critical/major/minor
alarms.
System
174
INPUT On (green) The voltage of the
input power is within
the specified range.
APIU
On (red) Undervoltage or
overvoltage occurs in
the input power.
OUTPUT On (green) The voltage of the
output power is
within the specified
range.
APIU
On (red) Undervoltage or
overvoltage occurs in
the output power.
ALM On (red) The rectifier module
is faulty. In normal
situations, the
indicator is off.
Rectifier module of
UPM
Vout On (green) The output of the
rectifier module is
normal.
RUN Flashing (green) The entire power
system is normal.
Monitoring module
of UPM
ALM On (red) The entire power
system is faulty. In
normal situations, the
indicator is off.

10.10 Safety Certification
The OptiX OSN 550 has passed many safety certifications.
Table 10-33 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has passed.
System
175
Table 10-33 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has passed
Item Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility l CE certification
l ETSI EN 301 489-1
l ETSI EN 301 489-4
l CISPR 22
l EN 55022
Surge protection l ITU-T K.27
l ETSI EN 300 253
Safety l CE certification
l ETSI EN 60215
l ETSI EN 60950
l IEC 60825
l GB 4943
Environmental protection l RoHS
l REACH

10.11 Environmental Specifications
The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environments for storage, transportation, and operation.
10.11.1 Storage Environment
The storage environment for the OptiX OSN 550 complies with the ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 and
NEBS GR-63-CORE standards.
Climate
Table 10-34 lists climate requirements.
Table 10-34 Climate requirements
Item Specification
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40C to +70C
Temperature change rate 1C/min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation
1120 W/m
2
System
176
Item Specification
Heat radiation
600 W/m
2

Waterproofing Requirements
Requirements for storing equipment on site: Generally, the equipment must be stored indoors.
No water should remain on the floor or leak into equipment crates. The equipment should be
placed away from areas where water leakage is possible (for example, do not place near
automatic fire-fighting extinguishing and heating systems).
Ensure that all the following four conditions are met if the equipment is stored outdoors:
l Crates are intact.
l Proper rain-proofing measures are taken to prevent water from entering crates.
l No water is on the ground where crates are placed and water is not seeped into crates.
l Crates are not exposed to direct sunlight.
Biological Environment
l Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete).
l Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive
dust.
l Table 10-35 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances.
Table 10-35 Density requirements for mechanically active substances
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Suspended dust
5.00 mg/m
3
Precipitable dust
20.0 mg/(m
h)
Sand particles
300 mg/m
3

l Table 10-36 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
Table 10-36 Density requirements for chemically active substances
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO
2 0.30 mg/m
3
System
177
H
2
S
0.10 mg/m
3
NO
2 0.50 mg/m
3
NH
3 1.00 mg/m
3
CL
2 0.10 mg/m
3
HCL
0.10 mg/m
3
HF
0.01 mg/m
3
O
3 0.05 mg/m
3

Mechanical Stress
Table 10-37 lists requirements for mechanical stress.
Table 10-37 Requirements for mechanical stress
Item Sub-item Specification
Sinusoidal
vibration
Displacement 1.5 mm -
Acceleration -
5 m/s
2
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz
Static load Static pressure Static pressure = Product weight x
(Maximum number of stacked layers that is
specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x
9.8 (N)
NOTE
Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is
stacked in the specified manner.

10.11.2 Transportation Environment
The transportation environment for the OptiX OSN 550 complies with the ETSI EN 300 019-1-2
standard.
Climate
Table 10-38 lists climate requirements.
System
178
Table 10-38 Climate requirements
Item Specification
Temperature -40C to +70C
Temperature change rate 1C/min
Relative humidity 5% to 95%
Solar radiation
1120 W/m
2
Heat radiation
600 W/m
2

Waterproofing Requirement
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l Crates are intact.
l Proper rain-proofing measures are taken for vehicles to prevent water from entering crates.
l No water is present in vehicles.
Biological Environment
l Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete).
l Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive
dust.
l Table 10-39 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances.
Table 10-39 Density requirements for mechanically active substances
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Suspended dust No requirement
Precipitable dust
3.0 mg/(m
2
h)
Sand particles
100 mg/m
3

l Table 10-40 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
System
179
Table 10-40 Density requirements for chemically active substances
SO
2 1.00 mg/m
3
H
2
S
0.50 mg/m
3
NO
x 1.00 mg/m
3
NH
3 3.00 mg/m
3
CL
2
-
HCL
0.50 mg/m
3
HF
0.03 mg/m
3
O
3 0.10 mg/m
3

Mechanical Stress
Random
vibration
Acceleration spectral
density
1 m
2
/s
3
-3 dB/oct
Shock Shock response
spectrum I (weight of
sample > 50 kg)
100 m/s
2
, 11 ms, 100 times for each panel
Shock response
spectrum II (weight
of sample 50 kg)
180 m/s
2
, 6 ms, 100 times for each panel
Static load Static pressure Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum
number of stacked layers that is specified on the
product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
NOTE
A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such
as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input.
Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is
stacked in the specified manner.

System
180
10.11.3 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed in
a Cabinet)
The operating environment for the OptiX OSN 550 complies with the ETSI EN 300 019-1-3
class3.2 standard.
Climate
Table 10-42 and Table 10-43 list climate requirements.
Table 10-42 Requirements on temperature and humidity during operation
Operating Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term operating
temperature: -5C to
+55C
Extended operating
temperature: -5C to
+65C
Longterm operating
range: 5% to 85%
Short-term operating
range: 5% to 95%
NOTE
The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of a chassis. Long-
term operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours and
the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 15 days.
Extended operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours
per day and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.

To improve equipment reliability, ensure that the equipment room is equipped with a precise air
conditioner, which controls temperature and humidity within the following ranges:
l Temperature range: 15C to 30C
l Humidity range: 40% to 75%
NOTE
Do not install an air conditioner right above equipment, to prevent air blowing directly from the air
conditioner vent into the equipment. Install an air conditioner as far away from a window as possible, to
prevent humid air blowing from the window to the equipment.
Table 10-43 Other climate requirements
Item Specification
Altitude -60 m to 4000 m
Temperature change rate 0.5C/min
Solar radiation
700 W/m
Heat radiation
600 W/m
Wind speed 5 m/s

System
181
NOTE
Between 1800 m and 4000 m of altitude, the equipment operating temperature decreases by 1C for every
increase of 220 m in altitude.
Water Resistance and Dust Resistance
l If a cabinet is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain, the cabinet must meet
the requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The first numeral "3" indicates that the cabinet
can prevent a solid object with a diameter equal to or greater than 2.5 mm from entering
the cabinet. The second numeral "1" indicates that vertically falling drops shall have no
harmful effects.)
l Ensure that there is no mouse in an equipment room, preventing mouse urine from entering
a cabinet.
Table 10-44 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances during equipment
operation.
Table 10-44 Density requirements for mechanically active substances during equipment
operation
Mechanically Active
Substance
Content
Suspended dust
0.4 mg/m
3
Precipitable dust
15 mg/(m
2
h)
Sand particles
300 mg/m
3

Corrosion Protection
Sites must meet the following anti-corrosion requirements:
l Sites must be kept away from pollution sources. If pollution sources cannot be avoided,
sites must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources, or cabinets
providing sufficient protection must be used.
For sources of heavy pollution such as metal smelting plants and coal mines, keep a
minimum distance of 5 km.
For sources of medium pollution such as chemical factories, rubber factories,
electroplating factories, agricultural fertilizer factories, paper mills, and power plants,
keep a minimum distance of 3.7 km.
For sources of light pollution such as food factories, leather factories, daily necessities
factories, and livestock farms, keep a minimum distance of 2 km.
l Equipment rooms must be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lakes, and must be
kept away from roads or sand fields with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot
be met, cabinets providing sufficient protection must be used.
l Equipment rooms must be isolated from sewer outlets, sewage treatment tanks, and
industrial/heating boilers, to prevent corrosive gases from eroding components and circuit
boards.
System
182
l Do not install network boxes in underground garages or other garages. If a network box
can be installed only in a garage, install it at a well-ventilated place and avoid car exhausts,
or select a network box providing sufficient protection.
l Power on equipment within seven days after it is installed in a cabinet.
Table 10-45 shows the content limits on corrosive gases.
Table 10-45 Content limits on corrosive gases
Item Content
SO
2 0.30 mg/m
3
H
2
S
0.10 mg/m
3
NH
3 1.00 mg/m
3
Cl
2 0.10 mg/m
3
HCl
0.10 mg/m
3
HF
0.01 mg/m
3
O
3 0.05 mg/m
3
NO
X 0.50 mg/m
3

The requirements for relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents are provided as follows:
NOTE
The relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents must be below 80%. If the relative humidity exceeds
80%, the anti-corrosion measures that the equipment provides can only decrease but not eliminate corrosion
risks.
If the humidity control measures that equipment rooms provide cannot keep the relative humidity
in the equipment rooms below 80%, adopt appropriate measures listed in Table 10-46.
Table 10-46 Measures for maintaining the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents
below 80%
Heat
Dissipati
on
Method
That
Equipme
nt Uses
Heat
Dissipat
ion
Method
That
Cabinet
s Use
Suggestion Remarks
Natural
dissipatio
n
Natural
dissipatio
n
None None
System
183
Heat
Dissipati
on
Method
That
Equipme
nt Uses
Heat
Dissipat
ion
Method
That
Cabinet
s Use
Suggestion Remarks
Natural
dissipatio
n
Fan
cooling
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do
not face cabinets' air intake vents, and keep a
distance greater than 150 mm between the two
types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold
air from entering the equipment.
None
Natural
dissipatio
n
Using
open
racks
Air conditioners and fans must not blow
directly towards equipment, to prevent damp/
cold air from entering the equipment.
None
Fan
cooling
Natural
dissipatio
n
l Keep a distance greater than 150 mm
between equipment's air intake vents and
cabinets' air intake vents, to prevent damp/
cold air from entering equipment.
l Ensure that cabinets have appropriate air
intake vents, to prevent a large amount of
damp/cold air from entering cabinets.
None
Fan
cooling
Fan
cooling
l Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do
not face cabinets' air intake vents, and
keep a distance greater than 150 mm
between the two types of air intake vents,
to prevent damp/cold air from entering the
equipment.
l Ensure that cabinets have appropriate air
intake vents, to prevent a large amount of
damp/cold air from entering cabinets.
l Cabinets must use temperature-controlled
fans, to prevent damp/cold air from
entering cabinets. To be specific, fans start
at high temperature and stop at low
temperature. It is recommended that fans
start when the temperature at cabinets' air
outlets exceeds 40C and stop when the
temperature is lower than 35C.
When the ambient
temperature
exceeds 30C, the
relative humidity
is below 80% in
most areas. In
addition, the
temperature at
cabinets' air outlets
is higher than the
ambient
temperature.
Therefore, it is
recommended that
fans stop when the
temperature at
cabinets' air outlets
is lower than 35C.
System
184
Heat
Dissipati
on
Method
That
Equipme
nt Uses
Heat
Dissipat
ion
Method
That
Cabinet
s Use
Suggestion Remarks
Fan
cooling
Using
open
racks
l The humidity control measures that
equipment rooms provide must ensure that
the relative humidity in the equipment
rooms is below 80%; otherwise, corrosion
risks cannot be avoided.
l Air conditioners must not blow cold air
directly towards equipment, to prevent the
relative humidity at equipment's air intake
vents from increasing.
l If equipment rooms use air conditioners to
decrease temperature, close doors
immediately after your entrance, to
prevent damp air from condensing.
None

Mechanical Stress
Sinusoidal
vibration
Velocity 5 mm/s -
Acceleration -
2 m/s

Shock Shock response spectrum
II
Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s
, 11 ms, 3 in
each direction
NOTE

10.11.4 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed
on a Wall)
The operating environment for the OptiX OSN 550 complies with the ETSI EN 300 019-1-3
class3.2 standard.
System
185
Climate
Table 10-48 and Table 10-49 list climate requirements.
Table 10-48 Requirements on temperature and humidity during operation
Operating Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term operating
temperature: -5C to
+55C
Extended operating
temperature: -5C to
+65C
Longterm operating
range: 5% to 85%
Short-term operating
range: 5% to 95%
NOTE
The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of a chassis. Long-
term operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours and
the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 15 days.
Extended operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours
per day and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.

To improve equipment reliability, ensure that the equipment room is equipped with a precise air
conditioner, which controls temperature and humidity within the following ranges:
l Temperature range: 15C to 30C
l Humidity range: 40% to 75%
NOTE
Do not install an air conditioner right above equipment, to prevent air blowing directly from the air
conditioner vent into the equipment. Install an air conditioner as far away from a window as possible, to
prevent humid air blowing from the window to the equipment.
Table 10-49 Other climate requirements
Item Specification
Altitude -60 m to 4000 m
Temperature change rate 0.5C/min
Solar radiation
700 W/m
Heat radiation
600 W/m
Wind speed 5 m/s

NOTE
Between 1800 m and 4000 m of altitude, the equipment operating temperature decreases by 1C for every
increase of 220 m in altitude.
System
186
Water Resistance
l Water resistance requirements for network boxes are provided as follows:
If a network box is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain, the network
box must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The first numeral "3"
indicates that the network box can prevent a solid object with a diameter equal to or
greater than 2.5 mm from entering the network box. The second numeral "1" indicates
that vertically falling drops shall have no harmful effects.)
If a network box is installed in a corridor that is exposed to rain, the network box must
meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection. ("IP" indicates international protection
rating. The first numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing solid objects from
entering network boxes. That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall
not penetrate in a quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of equipment or to
impair safety. The second numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing water from
entering network boxes. That is, water projected in jets against the enclosure from any
direction shall have no harmful effects.)
l Requirements for installing network boxes are provided as follows:
Equipment must be installed in a position away from water drips (outdoor units and
water pipes of air conditioners, sewer pipes, or windows).
Equipment must be installed in a position not exposed to rain.
Equipment must not be installed in light-current wells or directly on the corridor ground
on the first floor.
Equipment must not be mounted on a wall that is near to windows.
Route cables/fibers into network boxes only from the bottom sides. In addition,
waterproof the connection between cables/fibers and network boxes, to prevent rain
from entering network boxes along cables/fibers.
Dust Resistance
For dusty areas, network boxes with air filters are recommended (to improve equipment
reliability) and the network boxes must meet the requirements of IP51 rating protection. (The
first numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing solid objects from entering network boxes.
That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a quantity to
interfere with satisfactory operation of equipment or to impair safety.)
NOTE
For network boxes with air filters, clear the air filters periodically.
Table 10-50 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances during equipment
operation.
Table 10-50 Density requirements for mechanically active substances during equipment
operation
Mechanically Active
Substance
Content
Suspended dust
0.4 mg/m
3
Precipitable dust
15 mg/(m
2
h)
System
187
Mechanically Active
Substance
Content
Sand particles
300 mg/m
3

Corrosion Protection
Sites must meet the following anti-corrosion requirements:
l Sites must be kept away from pollution sources. If pollution sources cannot be avoided,
sites must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources, or network
boxes providing sufficient protection must be used.
For sources of heavy pollution such as metal smelting plants and coal mines, keep a
minimum distance of 5 km.
For sources of medium pollution such as chemical factories, rubber factories,
electroplating factories, agricultural fertilizer factories, paper mills, and power plants,
keep a minimum distance of 3.7 km.
For sources of light pollution such as food factories, leather factories, daily necessities
factories, and livestock farms, keep a minimum distance of 2 km.
l Installation sites must be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lakes, and must be kept
away from roads or sand fields with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be met,
network boxes providing sufficient protection must be used.
l Installation sites must be isolated from sewer outlets, sewage treatment tanks, and
industrial/heating boilers, to prevent corrosive gases from eroding components and circuit
boards.
l Do not install network boxes in underground garages or other garages. If a network box
can be installed only in a garage, install it at a well-ventilated place and avoid car exhausts,
or select a network box providing sufficient protection.
l Power on equipment within seven days after it is installed in a network box.
Table 10-51 shows the content limits on corrosive gases.
Table 10-51 Content limits on corrosive gases
Item Content
SO
2 0.30 mg/m
3
H
2
S
0.10 mg/m
3
NH
3 1.00 mg/m
3
Cl
2 0.10 mg/m
3
HCl
0.10 mg/m
3
HF
0.01 mg/m
3
O
3 0.05 mg/m
3
System
188
Item Content
NO
X 0.50 mg/m
3

The requirements for relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents are provided as follows:
NOTE
The relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents must be below 80%. If the relative humidity exceeds
80%, the anti-corrosion measures that the equipment provides can only decrease but not eliminate corrosion
risks.
If the humidity control measures that network boxes provide cannot keep the relative humidity
in the network boxes below 80%, adopt appropriate measures listed in Table 10-52.
Table 10-52 Measures for maintaining the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents
below 80%
Heat
Dissipati
on
Method
That
Equipme
nt Uses
Heat
Dissipat
ion
Method
That
Networ
k Boxes
Use
Suggestion Remarks
Natural
dissipatio
n
Natural
dissipatio
n
None None
Natural
dissipatio
n
Fan
cooling
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do
not face network boxes' air intake vents, and
keep a distance greater than 150 mm between
the two types of air intake vents, to prevent
damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
None
Fan
cooling
Natural
dissipatio
n
l Keep a distance greater than 150 mm
between equipment's air intake vents and
network boxes' air intake vents, to prevent
damp/cold air from entering equipment.
l Ensure that network boxes have
appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a
large amount of damp/cold air from
entering the network boxes.
None
System
189
Heat
Dissipati
on
Method
That
Equipme
nt Uses
Heat
Dissipat
ion
Method
That
Networ
k Boxes
Use
Suggestion Remarks
Fan
cooling
Fan
cooling
l Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do
not face network boxes' air intake vents,
and keep a distance greater than 150 mm
between the two types of air intake vents,
to prevent damp/cold air from entering the
equipment.
l Ensure that network boxes have
appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a
large amount of damp/cold air from
entering the network boxes.
l Network boxes must use temperature-
controlled fans, to prevent damp/cold air
from entering the network boxes. To be
specific, fans start at high temperature and
stop at low temperature. It is
recommended that fans start when the
temperature at network boxes' air outlets
exceeds 40C and stop when the
temperature is lower than 35C.
When the ambient
temperature
exceeds 30C, the
relative humidity
is below 80% in
most areas. In
addition, the
temperature at
network boxes' air
outlets is higher
than the ambient
temperature.
Therefore, it is
recommended that
fans stop when the
temperature at
network boxes' air
outlets is lower
than 35C.

Mechanical Stress
Sinusoidal
vibration
Velocity 5 mm/s -
Acceleration -
2 m/s

Shock Shock response spectrum
II
Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s
, 11 ms, 3 in
each direction
NOTE
System
190
11 Energy Saving and Environmental
Protection
The OptiX OSN 550 complies with RoHS directive (2002/95/EC), WEEE directive (2002/96/
EC) and REACH (REGULATION (EC) No 1907/2006).
Energy Saving
The OptiX OSN 550 adopts a variety of technologies to reduce equipment energy.
l Uses an easy scheme for board design.
l Replaces ordinary chips with ASIC chips that require low power consumption.
l Uses highly efficient power modules.
Environmental Protection
The equipment is designed according to the requirements of environmental protection. The
equipment complies with RoHS/REACH directive.
l The equipment is amply packaged while materials as conserved. The size of the package
containing the equipment and accessories is at most three times the size of the net
equipment.
l The product is also designed for easy unpacking. All hazardous substances contained in
the packaging decompose easily.
l Every plastic component that weighs over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of ISO
11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4.
l All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for
recycling.
l Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by
using simple tools.
l All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove.
l Certain types of identifying information, such as silkscreens, are printed on front panels or
subracks.
System
Product Description 11 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
191
12 Standard Compliance
About This Chapter
This section lists the standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations
This section lists the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
12.2 IETF Standards
This section lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
12.3 IEEE Standards
This section lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
12.4 Environment Related Standards
This section lists the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies
with.
12.5 MEF Standards
This section lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
12.6 Safety Standards
This section lists the safety standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
12.7 EMC Standards
This section lists the EMC Standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
12.8 Protection Standards
This section lists the protection standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
System
Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
192
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations
This section lists the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Table 12-1 ITU-T Recommendations
Recommendatio
n
Description
ITU-T G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
ITU-T G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
ITU-T G.703 Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
ITU-T G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and
44,736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures
relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704
ITU-T G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission
systems
ITU-T G.774 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management information model
for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.1 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) performance monitoring for the
network element view
ITU-T G.774.2 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of the payload
structure for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.3 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of multiplex-
section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.4 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of the sub-network
connection protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.5 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of connection
supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.6 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) unidirectional performance
monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.7 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of lower order path
trace and interface labeling for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.9 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of linear multiplex
System
193
Recommendatio
n
Description
ITU-T G.774.10 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of linear multiplex
ITU-T G.775 Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote
Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH
signals
ITU-T G.7710 Common equipment management function requirements
ITU-T G.780 Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) networks
and equipment
ITU-T G.781 Synchronization layer functions
ITU-T G.782 Types and Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.783 Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment
functional blocks
ITU-T G.784 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management
ITU-T G.803 Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.805 Generic functional architecture of transport networks
ITU-T G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology and
generic functionality
ITU-T G.808.1 Generic protection switching - Linear trail and sub-network protection
ITU-T G.810 Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
ITU-T G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in
synchronization networks
ITU-T G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
ITU-T G.821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a
bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated
services digital network
ITU-T G.822 Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection
ITU-T G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based
on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy
ITU-T G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based
on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,
constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
System
194
Recommendatio
n
Description
ITU-T G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,
constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
ITU-T G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections
ITU-T G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.832 Transport of SDH elements on PDH networks - Frame and multiplexing
structures
ITU-T G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.842 Inter-working of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.957 Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the
synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use
on optical fiber cables
ITU-T G.7043/Y.
1343
Virtual concatenation of plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
signals
ITU-T G.8010 Architecture of Ethernet layer networks
ITU-T G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1 Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2 Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.8012 Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI
ITU-T G.8021 Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment functional
blocks
ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1 Application of MPLS/MPLS-TP in the transport network
ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8131 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
ITU-T G.8261 Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks
ITU-T G.8262 Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock
(EEC)
ITU-T G.8264 Timing distribution through packet networks
ITU-T Y.1541 Network performance objectives for IP-based services
System
195
Recommendatio
n
Description
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1730 Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and
Ethernet services
ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks
ITU-T I.610 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
ITU-T Y.1291 An architectural framework for support of quality of service (QoS) in
packet networks
ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
ITU-T G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical
fiber and cable
ITU-T G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet ring protection switching
ITU-T G.8113.1 Operations, administration and maintenance mechanism for MPLS-TP
networks (G.tpoam)

12.2 IETF Standards
This section lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Table 12-2 IETF standards
Standard Description
RFC 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base
draft-ietf-l2vpn-
oam-req-
frmk-05
L2VPN OAM requirements and framework
RFC 4664 Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs)
RFC 3031 MPLS architecture
RFC 3469 Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery
System
196
RFC 3811 Definitions of textual conventions for multiprotocol label switching
(MPLS) management
RFC 3813 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) label switching router (LSR)
management information base
RFC 3814 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) forwarding equivalence class to
next hop label forwarding entry (FEC-To-NHLFE) management
information base
RFC 4115 A differentiated service two-rate, three-color marker with efficient
handling of in-profile traffic
RFC 4221 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview
RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol
label switched (MPLS) networks
RFC 4378 A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and
management (OAM)
RFC 3032 MPLS label stack encoding
RFC 3443 Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)
networks
RFC 3916 Requirements for pseudo-wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
RFC 3985 Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) architecture
RFC 4197 Requirements for edge-to-edge emulation of time division multiplexed
(TDM) circuits over packet switching networks
RFC 4385 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over
an MPLS PSN
RFC 4446 IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
RFC 0826 Ethernet address resolution protocol
RFC 3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated services
RFC 4448 Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks
RFC 4553 Structure-agnostic time division multiplexing (TDM) over packet
(SAToP)
RFC 5085 Pseudo wire virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV)
RFC 5086 Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation
Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN)
RFC 4717 Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Asynchronous Transfer Mode
(ATM) over MPLS Networks
System
197
RFC 4816 Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Asynchronous Transfer
Mode (ATM) Transparent Cell Transport Service
RFC 4385 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over
an MPLS PSN
RFC 5254 Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge
(PWE3)
draft-ietf-pwe3-
segmented-
pw-03
Segmented pseudo wire
draft-ietf-pwe3-
ms-pw-
requirements-03
Requirements for inter domain pseudo-wires
draft-ietf-pwe3-
ms-pw-arch-02
An architecture for multi-segment pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
RFC 3644 Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
RFC 2212 Specification of guaranteed quality of service
RFC 2474 Definition of the differentiated services field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and
IPv6 headers
RFC 2475 An architecture for differentiated services
RFC 2597 Assured forwarding PHB group
RFC 2698 A two rate three color marker
RFC 3246 An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
RFC 3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated services
RFC 5586 MPLS generic associated channel
RFC 5654 Requirements of an MPLS transport profile
RFC 5921 A framework for MPLS in transport networks
RFC 5860 Requirements for operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) in
MPLS transport networks
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 5317 Joint Working Team (JWT) Report on MPLS Architectural
Considerations for a Transport Profile
draft-ietf-mpls-
tp-oam-analysis
An Overview of the OAM Tool Set for MPLS based Transport Networks
STD 0062 An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) Management Frameworks
System
198

12.3 IEEE Standards
This section lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Table 12-3 IEEE standards
IEEE 802.1D Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider Bridges
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Amendment: Media
Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers, and Management
Parameters for Subscriber Access Networks
IEEE 802.1ag Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks - Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault
Management
IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Type 100BASE-T MAC parameters, Physical Layer, MAUs, and
Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation
IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex Operation and Type 100BASE-T2
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1AX Local and metropolitan area networks - Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and
management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and
management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
IEEE 802.1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol
IEEE 802.1p LAN Layer 2 QoS/CoS Protocol for Traffic Prioritization
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees
IEEE 802.3ab Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications - Physical Layer
Parameters and Specifications for 1000 Mb/s Operation over 4 pair of
Category 5 Balanced Copper Cabling, Type 1000BASE-T

System
199
12.4 Environment Related Standards
This section lists the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies
with.
Table 12-4 Environment related standards
ETSI EN 300
019-1-1
Environmental Engineering (EE)
Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunica-
tions equipment
Part 1-1: Classification of environmental conditions: Storage
Class 1.1: Weatherprotected, partly temperature-controlled storage
locations
Class 1.2: Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage
locations
ETSI EN 300
019-1-2
tions equipment
Part 1-2: Classification of environmental conditions: Transportation
Class 2.1: Very careful transportation
Class 2.2: Careful transportation
ETSI EN 300
019-1-3
tions equipment
Part 1-3: Classification of environmental conditions: Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations
Class 3.1: Temperature-controlled locations
Class 3.2: Partly temperature-controlled location
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of
groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1:
Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of
groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3:
Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETSI EN 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE)
Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
System
200
NEBS GR-63-
CORE
Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical
Protection
ROHS Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substance in electrical and
electronic equipment.
ETSI EN 300
019-2-3
Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for telecommunications equipment
Part 2-3: Specification of environmental tests Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations

12.5 MEF Standards
This section lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Table 12-5 MEF standards
MEF 2 Requirements and framework for Ethernet service protection in metro
Ethernet networks
MEF 4 Metro Ethernet network architecture framework - Part 1: generic framework
MEF 9 Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI
MEF 10 Ethernet services attributes phase 1
MEF 14 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1

12.6 Safety Standards
This section lists the safety standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Table 12-6 Safety standards
Safety Standard Description
EN 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
EN 60825-1 Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and
requirements
EN 60825-2 Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical fibre
communication systems
IEC 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
System
201
Safety Standard Description
IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser equipment
IEC 60825-2 Safety of laser equipment - requirement of OFCS
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment including
electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-
M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No
950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC 2006/95/EC
UL60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety
EG 201 212 Electrical safety; Classification of interfaces for equipment to
be connected to telecommunication networks
ITU-T G.644 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
EN 41003
IEC 41003
Particular safety requirements for equipment to be connected to
telecommunications networks and/or a cable distribution
system

12.7 EMC Standards
This section lists the EMC Standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Table 12-7 EMC related standards
EN 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 3-2: Limits Limits
emissions (equipment input current up to and including 16 A per
phase) (IEC 61000-for harmonic current 3-2:2005 + A1:2008 +
A2:2009)
EN 61000-3-11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 3-11: Limits
voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply
systems EquipmentLimitation of voltage changes,with rated
current <= 75 A and subject to conditional connection
System
202
IEC 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement
techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and
measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4
measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity
test
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5
measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances,
induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-29
EN 61000-4-29
measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and
voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance
characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity characteristics-
Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters
(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters
(ERM); Additional ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of
service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300127 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters
(ERM); Radiated emission testing of physically large
telecommunication systems
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications
equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
EN 50121-4 Railway applications-Electromagnetic Compatibility-Part 4:
Emission and immunity of the signalling and telecommunications
apparatus

System
203
12.8 Protection Standards
This section lists the protection standards that the OptiX OSN equipment complies with.
Table 12-8 Protection related standards
IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general
principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and measurement
techniques Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltages
and overcurrents
ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication
building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centers to surge
overvoltages
System
204
A Glossary
Numerics
1+1 backup A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active component
goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active component to
ensure that the system service is not interrupted.
1:N protection An architecture that has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails, and one
protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to
19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
A
A/D analog/digit
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AAL See ATM Adaptation Layer.
AAL2 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5
ABR See available bit rate.
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization.
ACH associated channel header
ACL See access control list.
ACL rule A rule for controlling the access of users.
ADM add/drop multiplexer
AF See assured forwarding.
System
Product Description A Glossary
205
AGC automatic gain control
AIO asynchronous input/output
AIS alarm indication signal
AIS insertion Insertion of AIS in a channel with excessive errors to indicate that it is unavailable. For
a line board, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the
B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For tributary board at the E1/T1 level, it can be set whether to
insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For tributary board at the E3 level
or higher, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B3
byte.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AM See adaptive modulation.
AMI See alternate mark inversion.
ANSI See American National Standards Institute.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APID access point identifier
APS automatic protection switching
APS 1+1 protection A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working facility
and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol.
Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS switchover event is
detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the protection facility.
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
AS See autonomous system.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASK amplitude shift keying
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ATM Adaptation
Layer (AAL)
An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).
The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of
information, including voice, video, and data.
ATM protection group Logically bound ATM VP network/subnetwork connections that share the same physical
transmission channel. In the VP Group (VPG), a pair of VP connections (working
connection and its protective connection) is used for monitoring the automatic protection
switching, called monitoring connections (APS VPCs). If the monitoring connections
switch over, the whole VPG will switch over to quicken the ATM protection switching
(as quick as the protection switching of the SDH layer).
ATPC See automatic transmit power control.
AU See administrative unit.
AUG See administrative unit group.
AWG arrayed waveguide grating
System
206
Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP)
An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.
American National
Standards Institute
(ANSI)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
Authentication,
Authorization and
Accounting (AAA)
A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security
services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related
network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users
according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the
consumption of network services by users.
access A link between the customer and the telecommunication network. Many technologies,
such as the copper wire, optical fiber, mobile, microwave and satellite, are used for
access.
access control list
(ACL)
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
resource.
access layer A layer that connects the end users (or last mile) to the ISP network. The access layer
devices are cost-effective and have high-density interfaces. In an actual network, the
access layer includes the devices and cables between the access points and the UPEs.
access point Any entity that has station functionality and provides access to the distribution services,
via the wireless medium (WM) for associated stations.
accumulation The sum of the service usage, consumption, and recharge fees of a subscriber.
active link A link in the link aggregation group, which is connected to the active interface.
active mode A working mode of EFM OAM. The discovery and remote loopback can only be initiated
by the interface in the active mode.
adaptive modulation
(AM)
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the
low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
adjacency A portion of the local routing information which pertains to the reachability of a single
neighbor ES or IS over a single circuit. Adjacencies are used as input to the Decision
Process for forming paths through the routing domain. A separate adjacency is created
for each neighbor on a circuit, and for each level of routing (i.e. level 1 and level 2) on
a broadcast circuit.
adjacent channel
alternate polarization
(ACAP)
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
adjacent concatenation A situation where the virtual containers (VC) to carry concatenated services in SDH are
consecutive in terms of their service in the frame structures, so that they use the same
path overhead (POH).
System
207
administrative unit
(AU)
The information structure that enables adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. The administrative unit consists of an information
payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer, which indicates the offset of the
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
administrative unit
group (AUG)
One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload.
An AUG consists of AU-4s.
advanced ACL An ACL that defines ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses, protocol
type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, and message
codes.
aggregated link Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes.
aging time The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
air interface The interface between the cellular phone set or wireless modem (usually portable or
mobile) and the active base station.
alarm A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management
system during the device polling process. Each alarm corresponds to a clear alarm. After
a clear alarm is received, the corresponding alarm is cleared.
alarm box A device that reflects the status of an alarm in visual-audio mode. The alarm box notifies
you of the alarm generation and alarm severity after it is connected to the Signaling
Network Manager server or client and the related parameters are set.
alarm cascading The method of cascading alarm signals from several subracks or cabinets.
alarm correlation
analysis
A process to analyze correlated alarms. For example, if alarm 2 is generated within five
seconds after alarm 1 is generated, and it complies with the conditions defined in the
alarm correlation analysis rule, you can either mask the alarm or raise the level of alarm
2 according to the behavior defined in the alarm correlation rule.
alarm filtering An alarm management method. Alarms are detected and reported to the NMS system,
and whether the alarm information is displayed and saved is decided by the alarm filtering
status. An alarm with the filtering status set to "Filter" is not displayed and saved on the
NMS, but is monitored on the NE.
alarm indication A mechanism to indicate the alarm status of equipment. On the cabinet of an NE, four
differently-colored indicators specify the current status of the NE. When the green
indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm has
been generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm has been generated.
When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm has been generated. The ALM alarm
indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm inversion mode A mode for an NE that indicates whether the port is automatically restored to the normal
status after the service is accessed or the fault is removed. There are three alarm inversion
modes: normal, revertible and non-revertible.
alarm notification When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarms
to the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated by
users.
alarm suppression A method to suppress alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are
suppressed are no longer reported from NEs.
alternate mark
inversion (AMI)
A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent logical
1 values.
System
208
analog signal A signal in which information is represented with a continuously variable physical
quantity, such as voltage. Because of this constant changing of the wave shape with
regard to its passing a given point in time or space, an analog signal might have a virtually
indefinite number of states or values. This contrasts with a digital signal that is expressed
as a square wave and therefore has a very limited number of discrete states. Analog
signals, with complicated structures and narrow bandwidth, are vulnerable to external
interference.
assured forwarding
(AF)
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
attack An attempt to bypass security controls in a system with the mission of using that system
or compromising it. An attack is usually accomplished by exploiting a current
vulnerability.
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
automatic laser
shutdown (ALS)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic transmit
power control (ATPC)
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
at the receiver
autonomous system
(AS)
A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology
administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging
from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.
availability A capability of providing services at any time. The probability of this capability is called
availability.
available bit rate (ABR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
avalanche photodiode
(APD)
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
average delay A performance indicator indicating the average RTT of multiple ping operations or other
probe operations. It is expressed in milliseconds.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA booster amplifier
BBE background block error
BC boundary clock
BCD binary coded decimal
System
209
BDI See backward defect indication.
BDI packet A packet used to notify the upstream LSR of the failure event which has occurred on the
downstream LSR through the reverse LSP. The BDI packet can be used in the 1:1/N
protective switchover service.
BE See best effort.
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BIP-X bit interleaved parity-X
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman.
BOM bill of materials
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS board protection switching
BSC See base station controller.
BSS base station subsystem
BTS base transceiver station
BW See bandwidth.
BWS backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
Bidirectional
Forwarding Detection
(BFD)
A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system regards
that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take actions to
recover the faulty link.
backbone network A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The
communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important
architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange
of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together
diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment,
or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the
networks connected to it.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional
electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backup A periodic operation performed on data stored in a database for the purposes of
recovering the data if an error occurs. The backup also refers to the data synchronization
between active and standby boards.
System
210
backward defect
indication (BDI)
A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth (BW) A range of transmission frequencies a transmission line or channel can carry in a network.
In fact, the bandwidth is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies in
the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer
rate.
base station area An area of radio coverage consisting of cells served by one or more Base Transceiver
Stations (BTSs) in the same base station site.
base station controller
(BSC)
A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It
interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface.
It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station
management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC
controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
baseband A form of modulation in which the information is applied directly onto the physical
transmission medium.
bayonet-neill-
concelman (BNC)
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
bearer An information transmission path with defined capacity, delay and bit error rate.
bearer network A network used to carry the messages of a transport-layer protocol between physical
devices.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
best-effort service A unitary and simple service model. Without being approved, but after notifying the
network, the application can send any number of packets at any time. The network tries
its best to send the packets, but delay and reliability cannot be ensured. Best-Effort is
the default service model of the Internet. It can be applied to various networks, such as
FTP and E-Mail. It is implemented through the First In First-Out (FIFO) queue.
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit interleaved parity
(BIP)
A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of
the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit
sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within the X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8
(BIP-8)
Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)
in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0"
over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is
odd, otherwise fill a 0.
System
211
blacklist A method of filtering packets based on their source IP addresses. Compared with ACL,
the match condition for the black list is much simpler. Therefore, the black list can filter
packets at a higher speed and can effectively screen the packet sent from the specific IP
address.
bound path A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data throughput
capacity.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store
and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges
differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU)
Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning
tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses,
priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU
messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These
loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing
redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
bridging The act of simultaneously transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection
channels.
broadband integrated
services digital network
(B-ISDN)
A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice.
It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at
155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
broadcast address A network address in computer networking that allows information to be sent to all nodes
on a network, rather than to a specific network host.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device
within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a
device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.
building integrated
timing supply (BITS)
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
built-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the
OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
burst A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the
block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast sending.
C
CAC See connection admission control.
CAR committed access rate
System
212
CAS multiframe A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1 PCM
frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits are used for
multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal (MFAS) for
synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not multiframe alignment signal
(NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15 frames, timeslot 16 is used to
transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M) signaling corresponding to each timeslot.
CBR See constant bit rate.
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization.
CCS See Common Channel Signaling.
CDVT cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CFM connectivity fault management
CFR cell fill rate
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLEI common language equipment identification
CLK clock card
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLP See cell loss priority.
CMI coded mark inversion
CO central office
CPU See central processing unit.
CR connection request
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CRC-4 multiframe A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of timeslot
0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in principle and
implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM frames. Each CRC-4
multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a
CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits. Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can
check the previous check block.
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CST See common spanning tree.
System
213
CTC common transmit clock
CV connectivity verification
CV packet A type of packet that is generated at the frequency of 1/s on the source end LSR of an
LSP, and is terminated on the destination end LSR of the LSP. A CV packet is transmitted
from the source end LSR to the destination LSR along the LSP. A CV packet contains
the unique identifier (TTSI) of the LSP so that all types of abnormalities on the path can
be detected.
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
Common Channel
Signaling (CCS)
A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information from
user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling information
for all other channels in the system.
Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST)
The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
cabinet Free-standing and self-supporting enclosure for housing electrical and/or electronic
equipment. It is usually fitted with doors and/or side panels which may or may not be
removable.
cable distribution plate A component, which is used to arrange cables in order.
cable tie A tie used to bind cables.
carrier An organization that has telecom network resources and can provide communications
service.
carrier sense multiple
access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD)
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
networking access method in which:
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped
if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is
unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be
dropped.
central processing unit
(CPU)
The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
centralized alarm The alarms of all the hosts connecting to the Operation and Maintenance Unit (OMU).
System
214
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or speed between two or more
locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave),
fiber, or any combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second
in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For
example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s
(1012 bit/s).
channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequencies or wavelengths between adjacent channels
in a WDM device.
check criteria A set of rules for checking and analyzing device echo information. The check criteria
for an alarm collection item need to be set through the configuration file.
circuit emulation
service (CES)
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
clock selection An algorithm used for selecting the best clock for clock synchronization. For different
peers (multiple servers or peers configured for a client), a peer sends clock
synchronization packets to each server or passive peer. After receiving the response
packets, it uses the clock selection algorithm to select the best clock.
clock source A device that provides standard time for the NTP configuration.
clock synchronization A process of synchronizing clocks, in which the signal frequency traces the reference
frequency, but the start points do not need to be consistent. This process is (also known
as frequency synchronization).
clock tracing The method of keeping the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in the
network.
co-channel dual
polarization (CCDP)
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization has twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
(CWDM)
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
collision A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the same time.
Their interference makes both unintelligible.
committed burst size
(CBS)
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an
IP packet to be forwarded.
common spanning tree
(CST)
A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region
is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree
generated with STP/RSTP.
composite service An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.
conference An IP multimedia session that have two or more participants. Each conference has a
focus and can be identified uniquely.
System
215
congestion Extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreased network service
efficiency.
congestion
management
A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. When
the network congestion occurs, it places packets into the queue for buffer and determines
the packet forwarding order.
connection An association of transmission channels or telecommunication circuits, switching and
other functional units set up to provide for the transfer of signals between two or more
network points, to support a single communication.
connection admission
control (CAC)
A control process in which the network takes actions in the call set-up phase (or call re-
negotiation phase) to determine which connection request is admitted.
connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
connectionless Pertaining to a method of data presentation. The data has a complete destination address
and is delivered by the network on a best-effort basis, independent of other data being
exchanged between the same pair of users.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
container A set of hardware or software devices. In software domain, it refers to the environment
variables and processes. In hardware domain, it refers to a type of topology node that
contains nodes, usually refers to one device with multiple frames; each node stands for
a frame.
continuity check (CC) An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the
connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity
Check Message (CCM).
control VLAN A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.
control channel The channel used to transmit digital control information from the base station to a cell
phone or vice-versa.
convergence layer A "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. The convergence layer provides
the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic
from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with
the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performance, fewer
interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to
the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.
cooling system The system that controls or influences climate by decreasing the air temperature only.
core layer A layer that functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks and provides
high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmission structure that
provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layer devices must
have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability, adaptability, and they support
dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network, the core layer
includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbone routers.
System
216
correlation The similarities when two random processes vary with time.
corruption The alteration of the information in IMS networks for the purpose of deception. For
example, attackers corrupt the correct charging information to evade being charged.
cross-connection The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between
line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections
of NEs.
crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one
piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa.
crystal oscillator An oscillator that produces electrical oscillations at a frequency determined by the
physical characteristics of a piezoelectric quartz crystal.
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting
to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cutover To migrate the data of an application system to another application system, which then
provides services.
cyclic redundancy
check (CRC)
A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission
is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because
each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
D/A digital-analog converter
DB database
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common
(with ground) (DC-C)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with
ground) (DC-I)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCE See data circuit-terminating equipment.
DCF data communication function
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
System
217
DDN See digital data network.
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DNI dual node interconnection
DRDB dynamic random database
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP differentiated services code point
DSL See digital subscriber line.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP digital signal processing
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTR data terminal ready
DVB digital video broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol (DVMRP)
An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
(DHCP)
A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires to participate
on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating IP addresses
to hosts.
data backup A method of copying key data to the backup storage area to prevent data loss in case the
original storage area is damaged or a failure occurs.
data circuit-
terminating equipment
(DCE)
The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal
equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE may be
separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment. The DCE
may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end of the line.
data communication
network (DCN)
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
communication function.
data communications
channel (DCC)
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as
the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is
referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
System
218
data flow A process that involves processing the data extracted from the source system, such as
filtering, integration, calculation, and summary, finding and solving data inconsistency,
and deleting invalid data so that the processed data meets the requirements of the
destination system for the input data.
data mapping An algorithm that is used to convert the data between heterogeneous data models.
data restoration A method for retrieving data that is lost due to damage or misoperations.
data terminal
equipment (DTE)
A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE
equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.
datagram A kind of protocol data unit (PDU) which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol
(CLNP), such as IP datagram, UDP datagram.
defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
delay measurement
(DM)
The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node,
when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
demodulation In communications, the means by which a modem converts data from modulated carrier
frequencies (waves that have been modified in such a way that variations in amplitude
and frequency represent meaningful information) over a telephone line. Data is converted
to the digital form needed by a computer to which the modem is attached, with as little
distortion as possible.
dense wavelength
division multiplexing
(DWDM)
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation
of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency
spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same
fiber.
designated port A port defined in the STP protocol. On each switch that runs the STP protocol, the traffic
from the root bridge is forwarded to the designated port. The subnet connected to the
STP switch receives the data traffic from the root bridge. All the ports on the root bridge
are designated ports. On each subnet, there is only one designated port. When a network
topology is stable, only the root port and the designated port forward traffic. Other non-
designated ports are in the blocking state, and they receive STP packets, but does not
forward user traffic.
destruction A process during which the information and resources in a network are changed
unexpectedly and the meanings of the information and resources are deleted or changed.
digital data network
(DDN)
A data transmission network that is designed to transmit data on digital channels (such
as the fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel).
digital modulation A method that controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier
based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can
be transmitted by the carrier.
digital network A telecommunication network where information is first converted into distinct
electronic pulses and then transmitted to a digital bit stream.
System
219
digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states
number of discrete states (for example, high and low voltages) rather than by fluctuating
levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM)
technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length.
Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals,
with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not
easily affected by external interference.
digital subscriber line
(DSL)
A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local
telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without
affecting the POTS service.
access multiplexer
(DSLAM)
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
dispersion The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths are
transmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of the
medium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs.
dispersion
compensation module
(DCM)
A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
distributed link
aggregation group
(DLAG)
A board-level port protection technology that detects unidirectional fiber cuts and
negotiates with the opposite port. In the case of a link down failure on a port or hardware
failure on a board, services are automatically switched to the slave board, thereby
achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
dotted decimal notation A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a dot
"." with each part is in the decimal numeral.
download To obtain data from an upper-layer device or the server.
downstream In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the link.
dual-ended switching A protection method in which switching is performed at both ends of a protected entity,
such as a connection or path, even if a unidirectional failure occurs.
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to simultaneously radiate or receive two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
EA encryption algorithm
EBS See excess burst size.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
System
220
EEPROM See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFCI explicit forward congestion indication
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EFM OAM Ethernet in the first mile OAM
EIA See Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EMS element management system
EPD early packet discard
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ESN See equipment serial number.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC Ethernet virtual connection
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Electronic Industries
Alliance (EIA)
An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various electronics
manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232-C, for example, is
the EIA standard for connecting serial components.
EoD See Ethernet over dual domains.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable and
easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000
Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet aggregation
(E-Aggr)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
System
221
Ethernet local area
network (E-LAN)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet over dual
domains (EoD)
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet
service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethernet private LAN
service (EPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line
(EPL)
networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
(EVPLAN)
networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL)
networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs
after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory
channel (ESC)
A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of
monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable
programable read-only
memory (EEPROM)
A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable
storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs
contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only
a limited number of times before wearing out.
electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic
interference (EMI)
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
embedded control
channel (ECC)
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
emergency
maintenance
A type of measure taken to quickly rectify an emergency fault to recover the proper
running of the related system or device and to reduce losses.
System
222
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message
from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame.
Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B
as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by
the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside
IP.
engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
enterprise system
connection (ESCON)
A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates a
rate of 200 Mbit/s.
entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment, or system that can be considered
individually.
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
equipment serial
number (ESN)
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation
of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA)
An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump laser
are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting with
doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it amplifies the
optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
error tolerance The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presence
of erroneous inputs.
event An event indicates the information record of the status change between the system and
the managed object, including the threshold alarm of the system and the alarm reported
by the managed object.
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, traffic
control is achieved by token buckets C and E. The excess burst size parameter defines
the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the
information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be
greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an IP packet to be
forwarded.
excess information rate
(EIR)
The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the
actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
exercise switching An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The
protection switching is not really performed.
expedited forwarding
(EF)
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits
(EXP)
A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify
the CoS of the MPLS packet.
System
223
extended ID The number of the subnet to which an NE belongs, used to identify different network
segments in a wide area network (WAN). Together, the ID and extended ID form the
physical ID of the NE.
external links The links between the current Web site and other Web sites. Generally, external links
refer to links from other Web sites to the current Web site.
extract To read the data required by the destination system from the source system.
F
F1 byte The user path byte, which belongs to the family of regenerator section overhead bytes.
F1 bytes are reserved for network providers, who use them primarily as a temporary data
or voice channel to transmit maintenance information.
FC See Fibre Channel.
FDB flash database
FDD See frequency division duplex.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.
FDI packet See forward defect indication packet.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FE port See fast Ethernet port.
FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection
FFD packet A path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the
frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service
requirements. By default, the frequency is 20/s. An FFD packet contains information the
same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same
way for processing CV packets.
FICON See Fiber Connect.
FIFO first in first out queuing
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FPS See fast protection switching.
FQ See flow queue.
FR See frame relay.
FRU field replaceable unit
FTN FEC to NHLFE
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect
(FICON)
A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units. It
carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
System
224
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on networks
carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fairness A feature in which for any link specified in a ring network, the source node is provided
with certain bandwidth capacities if the data packets transmitted by the source node are
constrained by the fairness algorithm.
fast Ethernet port (FE
port)
The port that provides a rate of 100 Mbit/s.
fast protection
switching (FPS)
A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the working
PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the sink receives
the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the interworking function
(IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services.
fault A failure to operate correctly. A fault does not include failures caused by preventative
maintenance, insufficient external resources, or intentional settings.
fault alarm A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure,
or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be
cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher severity
than event alarms.
fault detection The process of determining that a fault has occurred.
fault notification A process wherein a fault is notified. For example, when a fault occurs on the local
interface, the local interface notifies the peer of the fault through OAMPDUs. The local
interface then records the fault in the log, and reports it to the NMS.
feeder 1. A radio frequency transmission line interconnecting an antenna and a transmitter or
receiver. 2. For an antenna comprising more than one driven element, a radio frequency
transmission Line interconnecting the antenna input and a driven element.
fiber distributed data
interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
fiber trough A trough used for routing fibers.
field programmable
gate array (FPGA)
A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
(ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many
of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.
firewall A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network
security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the
firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network as
much as possible to protect the network security.
fixed bandwidth The bandwidth that is fully reserved and is allocated periodically in a GPON system to
ensure the quality of cell transmission. If a T-CONT is provided with a fixed bandwidth
and does not transmit cells, the OLT can still allocate/assign the fixed bandwidth.
Therefore, idle cells are transmitted to the upstream OLT from the ONU/ONT.
System
225
flash memory A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) and
can be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data stored
in flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off.
flooding A type of incident, such as insertion of a large volume of data, that results in denial of
service.
flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On boards, it is a group of
packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
flow queue (FQ) The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow. HQoS performs queue
scheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user are
classified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shaping
percentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for Weighted
Fair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidth
each; they can act at the same time without interfering each other.
forward defect
indication (FDI)
A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first
detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its
primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs
and (in turn) their client layers.
forward defect
indication packet (FDI
packet)
A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms of the
upper layer network where failure has occurred.
forward error
correction (FEC)
A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
fragmentation A process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network node
that does not support the original size of the packet.
frame delay variation
(FDV)
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number
of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames
arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the
egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length
packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent
virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake
of speed.
free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by
the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this
mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external
reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously
connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects
the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates
when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
System
226
frequency division
duplex (FDD)
An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink
and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both
uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
full rate A type of data transmission rate. The service bandwidth can be 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, or
2.4 kbit/s.
fuse A safety device that protects an electric circuit from excessive current, consisting of or
containing a metal element that melts when current exceeds a specific amperage, thereby
opening the circuit.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GCRA generic cell rate algorithm
GFC generic flow control
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GNE See gateway network element.
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GRE See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM See Global System for Mobile Communications.
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP)
A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined
by ITU-T G.7041.
Generic Routing
Encapsulation (GRE)
A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE
is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE serves as a
Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently transmitting data
packets.
Global Positioning
System (GPS)
A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
timing services to users worldwide.
Global System for
Mobile
Communications
(GSM)
The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally.
GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station
subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gain The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to
translate the data in the two network segments.
System
227
gateway network
element (GNE)
An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
management system.
general flow control A flow control that is applicable to the A interface, C/D interface, and trunks and can be
achieved by integrating multiple function modules. It is adopted when the traffic is heavy,
or location update and authentication of multiple subscribers are performed after the
system restarts. It can efficiently prevent system breakdown caused by link congestion
or CPU overload.
generic traffic shaping
(GTS)
A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
ground terminal A connection terminal on a communication device. It is used to connect the device with
ground cables, maintaining a tight connection between the device and the grounding
electrode.
H
HCS higher order connection supervision
HDB3 high density bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV See high definition television.
HEC See header error control.
HPA higher order path adaptation
HPT higher order path termination
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
High Speed Downlink
Packet Access
(HSDPA)
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
hang up A call processing mode used by an attendant to end the conversation with a user.
hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
of a board to the output optical interface of the board to achieve signal loopback.
header error control
(HEC)
A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the cell
Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in the
first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hello packet The commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. It contains
information about the DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), known neighbors and
timer values.
System
228
hierarchical quality of
service (HQoS)
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high definition
television (HDTV)
A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
historical performance
data
Performance data that is stored in the history register or that has been automatically
reported and stored in the NMS.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot patch A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program
without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the
built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or
queried.
I
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICC ITU carrier code
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ICP IMA Control Protocol
IDU See indoor unit.
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this
manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol.
ILM incoming label map
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IMA frame A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells,
numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
IP Internet Protocol
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the Internet.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies
the host itself.
System
229
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP See Internet service provider.
IST internal spanning tree
ITC independent transmit clock
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
IWF Interworking Function
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE)
A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Interior Gateway
Protocol (IGP)
A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-
sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information
protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP
(EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System
(IS-IS)
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
International
Telecommunication
Union (ITU)
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority
(IANA)
A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also
maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including
autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
(ICMP)
A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
host server and an Internet gateway.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
(IGMP)
One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain
multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
television (IPTV)
A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the media
streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to the
terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after media
streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).
System
230
Internet Protocol
version 4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol
version 6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service
provider (ISP)
An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
inbound Data transmission from the external link to the router for the routers that support the
NetStream feature.
indicator Description of a performance feature collected from the managed devices by the
performance collector.
indoor unit (IDU) The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services.
input jitter tolerance The measure of a receiver's ability to tolerate jitter on an incoming waveform.
insertion loss The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler,
or splice, into a previously continuous path.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power
adjustment (IPA)
A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of optical
signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured by the
laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in properly.
interleaving A process of systematically changing the bit sequence of a digital signal, usually as part
of the channel coding, in order to reduce the influence of error bursts that may occur
during transmission.
intermediate frequency
(IF)
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
inverse multiplexing
over ATM (IMA)
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate
is approximately the sum of the link rates.
J
jitter The measure of short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and
control system instability.
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.
K
System
231
K byte A general designation of K1 byte and K2 byte in the SDH.
L
L2 switching The switching based on the data link layer.
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LBM See loopback message.
LBR See loopback reply.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCN local communications network
LCT local craft terminal
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
LED See light emitting diode.
LER See label edge router.
LIFO See last in first out.
LIU logical interface unit
LL logical link
LLC See logical link control.
LLID local loopback ID
LM See loss measurement.
LOC loss of continuity
LOM loss of multiframe
LOP loss of pointer
LOS See loss of signal.
LP lower order path
LPA lower order path adaptation
LPF See low-pass filter.
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path.
System
232
LSR See label switching router.
LT linktrace
LTM See linktrace message.
LTR See linktrace reply.
LU line unit
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch
transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address
is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2
switching.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP)
A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely
identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It
is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information.
label distribution Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLS
label resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label and
the FEC. Then, LSRs sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label
and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution.
label edge router (LER) A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign
labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label space Value range of the label allocated to peers.
label switched path
(LSP)
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
common routing mechanisms or through configuration.
label switching router
(LSR)
Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. Semi-conductor lasers provide the light
used in a fiber system.
last in first out (LIFO) A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly.
layer A concept used to allow transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
license A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and
duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license
consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the
license.
System
233
light emitting diode
(LED)
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product
on the market, from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights, and
perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical
mice, and laser printers.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
linear MSP linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group
(LAG)
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the network and element management systems.
link monitoring A mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when the interface detects
that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frame seconds reaches or
exceeds the specified threshold.
link protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the point of local repair (PLR). When the PLR fails to
provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.
linktrace message
(LTM)
The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP.
LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply (LTR) For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus
1.
load balancing The distribution of activity across two or more servers or components in order to avoid
overloading any one with too many requests or too much traffic.
loading A process of importing information from the storage device to the memory to facilitate
processing (when the information is data) or execution (when the information is
program).
local MEP An MEP of a device on a network enabled with Ethernet CFM.
local area network
(LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current
LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000
Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical interface An interface that does not exist physically and comes into being through configuration.
It can also exchange data.
logical link control
(LLC)
According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
System
234
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback message
(LBM)
The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination
node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
loopback reply (LBR) A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the
destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM.
The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending
time of LBR.
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames
where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a
pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
low-pass filter (LPF) A filter designed to transmit electromagnetic frequencies below a certain value, while
excluding those of a higher frequency.
lower threshold A lower performance limit which when exceeded by a performance event counter will
trigger a threshold-crossing event.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.
MAC address aging A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received
from this device within a specified time period.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MAN See metropolitan area network.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF message communication function
MCR minimum cell rate
MD See maintenance domain.
MDP message dispatch process
ME See maintenance entity.
MEG maintenance entity group
MEL maintenance entity group level
MEP See maintenance entity group end point.
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIP See maintenance entity group intermediate point.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MP maintenance point
System
235
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MS multiplex section
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSB most significant bit
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST See multiplex section termination.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTIE maximum time interval error
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
MUX See multiplexer.
Media Access Control
(MAC)
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning
Tree region (MST
region)
A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS)
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols.
System
236
main topology A basic component of a human-machine interface. It is the default client interface of the
NMS and intuitively displays the structure of a network, NEs on the network, subnets in
the network as well as the NE communication and running status, reflecting the overall
network running status.
maintenance domain
(MD)
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity
fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single
Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity
(ME)
An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a
transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
maintenance entity
group end point (MEP)
An end point of a MEG, which is able to initialize and stop the transmission of OAM
data packets for fault management and performance monitoring.
maintenance entity
group intermediate
point (MIP)
An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond to
some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or perform
any operations on network connections.
management
information
The information that is used for network management in a transport network.
maximum transmission
unit (MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
mean time between
failures (MTBF)
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair
(MTTR)
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
measurement period The interval for NEs to report measurement results to the Network Management System
(NMS).
medium A physical medium for storing computer information. A medium is used for data
duplication and keeping the data for some time. Original data can be obtained from a
medium.
member A basic element for forming a dimension according to the hierarchy of each level. Each
member represents a data element in a dimension. For example, January 1997 is a typical
member of the time dimension.
metropolitan area
network (MAN)
A medium-scale computer network with area larger than that covered by a LAN and
smaller than that covered by a WAN. It interconnects multiple LAN networks in a
geographic region of a city.
microwave The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infrared
radiation, typically above about 1 mm.
mirroring The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several
computers with identical data.
System
237
monitoring A method that an inspector uses to inspect a service agent. By monitoring a service agent,
an inspector can check each detailed operation performed by the service agent during
the conversation and operate the GUI used by the service agent. The inspector helps the
service agent to provide better service.
mounting An auxiliary or associated condition or component of a device.
mounting ear A piece of angle plate on a rack. The mounting ear has holes that can be used to fix
network elements or components.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
multicast listener
discovery (MLD)
A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment
signal (MFAS)
A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish
and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree
instance (MSTI)
A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply
and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that
is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to
multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section
protection (MSP)
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section
termination (MST)
A function that generates the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) during the formation
of an SDH frame signal and that terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
multiprotocol label
switching virtual
private network
(MPLS VPN)
An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label
switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and
switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing
technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband
Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NAS network access server
System
238
NC See NTP client.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NGN See next generation network.
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NLP normal link pulse
NM network management
NMC network management center
NNI network-to-network interface
NP See network processor.
NPC See network parameter control.
NPE network provider edge
NRT-VBR non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ non-return to zero
NRZ code non-return-to-zero code
NRZI non-return to zero inverted
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
NTP Network Time Protocol
NTP client (NC) A bottom-level device in the time synchronization network. An NTP client obtains time
from its upper-level NTP server without providing the time synchronization service.
Compared with the top-level NTP server, the intermediate NTP server sometimes is
called an NTP client.
network layer Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer
provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In
addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/
IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by
IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network parameter
control (NPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
network processor (NP) An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking
application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices
and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are
commonly used in many different types of equipment and products.
network segment Part of a network on which all message traffic is common to all nodes; that is, a message
broadcast from one node on the segment is received by all other nodes on the segment.
network service A service that needs to be enabled at the network layer and maintained as a basic service.
System
239
network service access
point (NSAP)
A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available
to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network
connection or configuration problems.
next generation
network (NGN)
A packet-based network aimed to address requirement of various services. It adopts an
integrated and open network framework. In NGN, services are separated from call
control; call control is separated from bearer. In this way, services are independent of
network. NGN can provide various services, such as voice services, data services,
multimedia services or the integration of several services.
noise figure A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in
a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the output
noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in the input
termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise figure is thus
the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device itself did not
introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio receiver can be
specified.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network
element (non-GNE)
A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
gateway NE application layer.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OA optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OAU See optical amplifier unit.
OC ordinary clock
OCP optical channel protection
OCS optical core switching
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit.
OFS out-of-frame second
OHA overhead access
OHP overhead processing
OLT optical line terminal
ONU See optical network unit.
OPEX operating expense
System
240
OPU optical channel payload unit
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN optical transport network
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
Open Shortest Path
First (OSPF)
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
offline Pertaining to the disconnection between a device or a service unit and the system or the
network, or no running of a device and service unit.
online A state indicating that a computer device or program is activated and is ready for
operations, and can communicate with a computer or can be controlled by the computer.
operation,
administration and
maintenance (OAM)
A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location,
and repair.
optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM)
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier unit
(OAU)
A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used
in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. An optical attenuator is
used to ensure that the optical power of a signal at the receive end is not excessively
high.
optical connector A component attached to the end of an optical fiber that allows the fiber to connect to
another fiber or an optical source.
optical fiber A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded
light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection.
optical interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
optical network unit
(ONU)
A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
System
241
optical splitter A passive component, which is used for splitting and sending optical power to multiple
ONUs connected by an optical fiber. In a GPON system that consists of the OLT, ONU,
splitter, and optical fibers, according to the split ratio, the optical signal over the optical
fiber connected to the OLT is splitted into multiple channels of optical signals and send
each channel to each ONU. Split ratio determines how many channels of optical signals
an optical fiber can be split to.
optical supervisory
channel (OSC)
A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain
reflectometer (OTDR)
A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and measures
the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length and light loss,
and to locate fiber faults.
optical transponder
unit (OTU)
A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU) The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PA power amplifier
PADR PPPoE active discovery request
PBS See peak burst size.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCM See pulse code modulation.
PCR See peak cell rate.
PCS physical coding sublayer
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PGND cable A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PKT partition knowledge table
PLL See phase-locked loop.
System
242
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
POH path overhead
POS See packet over SDH/SONET.
PPD partial packet discard
PPI PDH physical interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS port protection switching
PQ See priority queuing.
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSD See power spectrum density.
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PSU power supply unit
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PVC permanent virtual channel
PVID See port default VLAN ID.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
packet discarding A function of discarding the packets from unknown VLAN domain or broadcast packets.
Packet Discarding is used to prevent the situation where unknown packets or broadcast
packets use the bandwidth on a link, improving the reliability of service transmission.
packet forwarding An action performed by a router to forward a received datagram, where the destination
IP address does not match the IP address of the router, to another router or destination
host on the router list.
packet loss The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot
accept any incoming data at a given moment.
packet over SDH/
SONET (POS)
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
System
243
packet rate The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s or
bytes/s.
packet switched
network (PSN)
A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
packet switching A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging
packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.
paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
parity bit A check bit appended to an array of binary digits to make the sum of all the binary digits,
including the check bit, always odd or always even.
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits,
usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or
even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the
transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and
attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error,
may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
parts replacement A maintenance operation of removing a faulty part or a part to be examined from a
running device and then installing a new part.
passive mode A working mode of EFM OAM. An interface in the passive mode cannot initiate the
discovery and remote loopback.
patch An independent software unit used for fixing the bugs in software.
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that defines the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP
packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate.
peak cell rate (PCR) The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
peer BGP speakers that exchange information with each other.
per-hop behavior
(PHB)
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
performance alarm An alarm generated when the actual result of a measurement entity equals the predefined
logical expression for threshold or exceeds the predefined threshold.
performance
parameters
The performance parameters identify some indexes to scale the general performance of
the system. The indexes include the number of managed nodes, number of supported
clients and log database capacity. The parameters are sorted into static parameters,
dynamic parameters and networking bandwidth parameters.
performance register The memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance
register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historical performance register,
24-hour historical performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of
performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional
module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the
performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the
quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
System
244
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result
reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system
generates a performance alarm.
permanent virtual path
(PVP)
Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
phase The relative position in time within a single period of a signal.
phase-locked loop
(PLL)
A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
physical layer Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides
services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems
and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking.
physical link The link between two physical network elements (NEs). When the user creates NEs or
refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according
to the topology structure information on the device. The remark information of a physical
link can be modified, but the physical link cannot be deleted.
ping A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the
sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.
ping test A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP address
on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to the
data packet of the same size returned from the target host.
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy (PDH)
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service
(P2P)
A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
terminal users.
pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
policy A set of rules that are applied when the conditions for triggering an event are met.
policy template A template that is used to define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example,
rating, debiting and accumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be
instantiated. They can be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation
method, and action functions are carried out.
polling A mechanism for the NMS to query the agent status and other data on a regular basis.
port default VLAN ID
(PVID)
A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame carries no
VLAN tag when reaching the port.
System
245
port priority The priority that is used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received
on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially.
power adjustment A method for dynamically and properly assigning power according to the real-time status
of a wireless network. When an AP runs under an AC for the first time, the AP uses its
maximum transmit power. When getting reports from its neighbors (that is, other APs
that are detected by the AP and managed by the same AC), the AP determines to increase
or decrease its power according to the report conclusion.
power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power control A process in which the MS or BS uses certain rules to adjust and control the transmit
power according to the change in the channel condition and the power of the received
signal.
power distribution unit
(PDU)
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
power module The module that converts the external power input into the power supply for internal
use. Power modules are classified into AC power modules and DC power modules.
power off An operation that switches off devices during upgrade or expansion.
power on To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power
power spectrum
density (PSD)
The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain.
printed circuit board
(PCB)
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
priority queuing (PQ) A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ
algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower
latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets of
higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are processed earlier
than others.
private line A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the
telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements.
protection path A path in a protection group that transports services when a fault occurs on the working
path.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be
a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS)
A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of
the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
System
246
pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3)
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a
telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network
(PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division
multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
public switched
telephone network
(PSTN)
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
pulse A variation above or below a normal level and a given duration in electrical energy.
pulse code modulation
(PCM)
A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of pulses.
Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can change
continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several predefined
values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog, pulse code
modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q
QA Q adaptation
QAM See quadrature amplitude modulation.
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN
tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to
be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN
tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent
transmission of packets over private VLANs.
QoS See quality of service.
quadrature amplitude
modulation (QAM)
Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message signals,
or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of two carrier waves,
using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation scheme or amplitude
modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two waves, usually sinusoids, are
out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus called quadrature carriers or quadrature
components hence the name of the scheme.
quadrature phase shift
keying (QPSK)
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
System
247
RAI remote alarm indication
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
REI remote error indication
RF See radio frequency.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RNC See radio network controller.
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RP rendezvous point
RPR resilient packet ring
RS232 See Reference Standard 232.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others
are the same as RS232.
RSL See received signal level.
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RSSI See received signal strength indicator.
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RTN radio transmission node
RTP See Real-Time Transport Protocol.
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Real-Time Transport
Protocol (RTP)
A protocol defined by the IETF for transmitting audio and video streams. RTP is based
on UDP. In the RTP header, a time stamp is defined to ensure that audio and video data
can be transmitted and synchronized in real time. H.323 is based on RTP.
Reference Standard
232 (RS232)
A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals, and
the physical size and pinout of connectors.
Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service
(RADIUS)
A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its
transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the
retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
System
248
Routing Information
Protocol (RIP)
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a distance
vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers
and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network
controller (RNC)
A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
integrity of radio resources.
radio propagation
model
An empirical mathematical formulation for the characterization of radio wave
propagation as a function of frequency, distance and other conditions. A single model is
usually developed to predict the behavior of propagation for all similar links under
similar constraints.
random early detection
(RED)
A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
rate limiting A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on a
physical interface or a Tunnel interface. Rate limiting is directly enabled on the interface
to control the traffic passing the interface.
real-time variable bit
rate (rt-VBR)
A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP
(VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),
sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source
device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
reboot To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards.
received signal level
(RSL)
The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
received signal strength
indicator (RSSI)
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
recognition Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.
reference clock A stable and high-precision autonomous clock that provides frequencies as a reference
for other clocks.
reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
System
249
relay An electronic control device that has a control system and a system to be controlled. The
relay of the telepresence system is used to control the power of telepresence equipment
and is controlled by the telepresence host.
remote optical
pumping amplifier
(ROPA)
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and
monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation
solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
reservation An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount,
free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action ensures
that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.
resistance The ability to impede (resist) the flow of electric current. With the exception of
superconductors, all substances have a greater or lesser degree of resistance. Substances
with very low resistance, such as metals, conduct electricity well and are called
conductors. Substances with very high resistance, such as glass and rubber, conduct
electricity poorly and are called nonconductors or insulators.
resource sharing A physical resource belonging to two or more protection subnetworks.
response A message that is returned to the requester to notify the requester of the status of the
request packet.
robustness The ability of a system to maintain function even with changes in internal structure or
external environment.
rollback A return to a previous condition through cancellation of a certain operation.
root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can change
dynamically.
router A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the
optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a
network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for
sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a
WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
routing The determination of a path that a data unit (frame, packet, message) traverses from
source to destination.
routing protocol A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should be
forwarded.
rt-VBR See real-time variable bit rate.
S
System
250
S1 byte A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network,
each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock
synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock
reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference
source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole
network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source
it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status
information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to
indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks
in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching
protocol.
SAN storage area network
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC square connector
SCR sustainable cell rate
SD See signal degrade.
SD trigger flag A signal degrade trigger flag that determines whether to perform a switching when SD
occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDP serious disturbance period
SDRAM See synchronous dynamic random access memory.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SEMF synchronous equipment management function
SES severely errored second
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SMSR side mode suppression ratio
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCMP subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SOH section overhead
System
251
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPE See superstratum provider edge.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB synchronization status message byte
SSU synchronization supply unit
STD system target decoder
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVC switched virtual connection
Secure File Transfer
Protocol (SFTP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer
and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP)
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status
Message (SSM)
A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or
synchronization network.
security Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of
computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through
communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals.
security service A service, provided by a layer of communicating open systems, which ensures adequate
security of the systems or of data transfer.
self-healing A function of establishing a replacement connection by network without the network
management connection function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement
connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network
resources available at that time.
serial port An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's
CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data
communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers.
service flow An MAC-layer-based unidirectional transmission service. It is used to transmit data
packets, and is characterized by a set of QoS parameters, such as latency, jitter, and
throughput.
service level The level of service quality of an evaluated party in a specified period, determined by
an evaluating party.
service protection A measure that ensures that services can be received at the receive end.
System
252
session A logical connection between two nodes on a network for the exchange of data. It
generally can apply to any link between any two data devices. A session is also used
simply to describe the connection time.
shaping A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific
defined traffic profile.
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio
(SNR)
The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB.
signaling The information exchange concerning the establishment and control of a
telecommunication circuit and the management of the network.
single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the
protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure.
single-pair high-speed
(SHDSL)
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and
HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user
terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse
amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide
the broadband access service.
single-polarized
antenna
An antenna intended to radiate or receive radio waves with only one specified
polarization.
slicing Dividing data into the information units proper for transmission.
smooth upgrade Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment.
standard definition-
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
static ARP A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IP
addresses must be forwarded through this gateway.
static route A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure
it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal
state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure
bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is
faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must
be changed by the operators.
statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques.
System
253
steering A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-
based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH transoceanic multiplex section
protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the source and sink nodes
of a service.
stress The force, or combination of forces, which produces a strain; force exerted in any
direction or manner between contiguous bodies, or parts of bodies, and taking specific
names according to its direction, or mode of action, as thrust or pressure, pull or tension,
shear or tangential stress.
subnet A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example,
according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched
with the IP address.
superstratum provider
edge (SPE)
Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE devices that
are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices. The PWs set up
between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the SPE devices. The
SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE side and those of the
UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE.
switching capacity The backplane bandwidth or switching bandwidth. The switching capacity is the
maximum data that can be processed by the interface processor of a switch and the data
bus. The backplane bandwidth indicates the overall data switching capability of a switch,
in Gbit/s.
switching priority A priority assigned to boards that share protection. If multiple boards that are sharing
protection fail, the services of the board with the highest priority are switched to the
protection board. If two or more boards have the same priority, the services of whichever
board fails first are switched.
synchronous digital
hierarchy (SDH)
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous dynamic
random access memory
(SDRAM)
A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than conventional
memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus and is capable of
running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional FPM RAM, and about
twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM is replacing EDO DRAM in
computers.
synchronous optical
network (SONET)
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to
connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple
data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but
multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCI tag control information
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCN topology change notification
System
254
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDC tunable dispersion compensator
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TE terminal equipment
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
TLV See type-length-value.
TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOD time of day
TPID tag protocol identifier
TPS See tributary protection switching.
TPS protection The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N
tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching
command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to
the specified protection board and the protection board takes over as the working board.
After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically switched to the original board.
TSD trail signal degrade
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live.
TTSI See trail termination source identifier.
TU tributary unit
TU-LOP tributary unit loss of pointer
TUG tributary unit group
Tc committed rate measurement interval
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users
to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system.
Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP)
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP)
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication.
System
255
tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
tangent ring A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between
them. The common node often leads to single-point failures.
telecommunications
management network
(TMN)
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
equipment, networks, and services.
terminal multiplexer
(TM)
A device used at a network terminal either to multiplex multiple channels of low rate
signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate
signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
threshold A limitation on an amount, scale, or level. Changes will occur when a threshold is
reached.
threshold alarm The alarm occurs when the monitored value exceeds the threshold.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,
service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth.
throughput capability The data input/output capability of the data transmission interface.
time division
multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
timer Symbolic representation for a timer object (for example, a timer object may have a
primitive designated as T-Start Request). Various MAC entities utilize timer entities that
provide triggers for certain MAC state transitions.
timestamp The current time of an event that is recorded by a computer. By using mechanisms such
as the Network Time Protocol (NTP), a computer maintains accurate current time,
calibrated to minute fractions of a second.
token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, and
the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket
polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset
rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can
be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there
are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input.
topology The configuration or layout of a network formed by the connections between devices on
a local area network (LAN) or between two or more LANs.
topology discovery A technique to accurately determine the exact layout of a network using a few
assumptions about the network architecture and simple tools.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.
traceroute A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of datagrams
with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time exceeded messages
that return to determine routers along the path.
System
256
traffic The product of the number of calls made and received and the average duration of each
call in a measurement period.
traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different
priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire
network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
traffic policy A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions.
traffic shaping A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the
performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the
scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices,
avoiding packet loss and congestion.
traffic statistics An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and
telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the
operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks. The
statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems, monitor
and maintain the networks, and plan the networks.
trail management
function
A network level management function of the network management system. This function
enables you to configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes
of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly,
manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance
data by trail, and print a trail report.
trail termination source
identifier (TTSI)
A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the connectivity
verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it matches the TTSI
received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect.
transaction Business between the customer and carrier, such as payment, and account adjustment.
transfer A process of transferring the account balance of an account to another account.
transit A packet is transmitted along an LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the packet is
labeled. The intermediate nodes are named transits.
transit node All the nodes except the master node on an RRPP ring.
transmission delay The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the
site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and the
equipment forwarding latency.
transmit power control A technical mechanism used within some networking devices in order to prevent too
much unwanted interference between different wireless networks.
transparent
transmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but
encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
tray A component that can be installed in a cabinet for holding chassis or other components.
tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the
tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and
inloop.
tributary protection
switching (TPS)
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary
processing boards.
trunk Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as
speech, data and video signals.
System
257
trunk link A link used to transport VLAN communication between two switches.
trunk port A switch port used to connect to other switches. The trunk port can connect to only the
trunk link. Only VLANs allowed to pass through a trunk port can be configured on the
trunk port.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
tunnel ID A group of information, including the token, slot number of an outgoing interface, tunnel
type, and location method.
twisted pair cable A type of cable that consists of two independently insulated wires twisted around one
another for the purposes of canceling out electromagnetic interference which can cause
crosstalk. The number of twists per meter makes up part of the specifications for a given
type of cable. The greater the number of twists is, the more crosstalk is reduced.
two rate three color
marker (trTCM)
An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates,
Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it
exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
type-length-value
(TLV)
An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called Code-
Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different
values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the
TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can
be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing information loaded in
packets.
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS unavailable second
UAT See unavailable time event.
UBR unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
UPS uninterruptible power supply
System
258
User Datagram
Protocol (UDP)
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP
provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery
service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of
order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet
is received.
unavailable time event
(UAT)
An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds.
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unknown multicast
packet
A packet for which no forwarding entry is found in the multicast forwarding table.
uplink A transmission channel through which radio signals or other signals are transmitted to
the central office.
uplink tunnel GTP Tunnel from the Mobile Node to the SGSN.
upper limit A maximum consumption amount that a carrier sets for a subscriber in a bill cycle. If
the consumption amount if a subscriber exceeds the maximum consumption amount, the
OCS system deducts only the maximum consumption amount from the account of the
subscriber.
upstream In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.
upstream board A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream board,
services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device.
usage parameter
control (UPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network
interface (UNI)
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
V.24 The physical layer interface specification between DTE and DCE defined by the ITU-
T. It complies with EIA/TIA-232.
VAS See value-added service.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC trunk See virtual container trunk.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
System
259
VCI virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VIP very important person
VLAN virtual local area network
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by
translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the
destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into
private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the
destination.
VLAN mapping table One of the properties of the MST region, which describes mappings between VLANs
and spanning tree instances.
VLAN stacking A technology that adds a VLAN tag to each incoming packet. The VLAN stacking
technology implements transparent transmission of C-VLANs in the ISP network to
realize the application of Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (VPN).
VP See virtual path.
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI virtual switch interface
Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP)
A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address.
The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router.
If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup
group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.
value-added service
(VAS)
A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers based
on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network technologies,
computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide value-added
services.
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
virtual channel
connection (VCC)
A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-
to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end
points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network
with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or
switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation
group (VCG)
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link.
System
260
virtual container trunk
(VC trunk)
The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs.
virtual fiber The fiber that is created between different devices. A virtual fiber represents the optical
path that bears SDH services in a WDM system.
virtual path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM
network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier
(VPI)
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN
service (VPLS)
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual user-network
interface (V-UNI)
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voltage drop The voltage developed across a component or conductor by the flow of current through
the resistance or impedance of that component or conductor.
W
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRED See weighted random early detection.
WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.
Wideband Code
Division Multiple
Access (WCDMA)
A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
wavelength The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a traveling wave, that is, the distance
over which a wave is transmitted within a vibration period.
weighted fair queuing
(WFQ)
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early
detection (WRED)
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
System
261
wireless local area
network (WLAN)
A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction
through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN.
working path A path allocated to transport the normal traffic.
working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
wrapping A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-
based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH two-fiber bidirectional multiplex
section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the node that detects
a failure. For details, see ITU-T G.841.
X
X.21 ITU-T standard for serial communications over synchronous digital lines. It is mainly
used in Europe and Japan.
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
Y
Y.1731 The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by
IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined
OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI),
Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance
Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor Specific (VSP) for
fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement (LM),
and delay measurement (DM).
System
262

OSN 550 V100R007C10 Product Description

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 550 V100R007C10 Product Description

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical

Wind speed 5 m/s

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz

Wind speed 5 m/s

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz

You might also like